Braun 5761 Electric Shaver User Manual

Introduction
Connections
D-VR610KU
Disc
Management
OWNER’S MANUAL
Basic Setup
TOSHIBA DVD VIDEO RECORDER / VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
DVD VIDEO RECORDER / VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
Recording
D-VR610KU
D
VR610KU
Playback
Editing
Function Setup
© 2008 Toshiba Corporation
Others
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_cover.indd 2-3
1VMN24593 / E9KGAUD
VCR Function
Printed in China
Owner’s Record
The model number and serial number are on the back
of your DVD Recorder. Record these numbers in the spaces
below. Refer to these numbers whenever you
communicate with your Toshiba dealer about this DVD
Recorder.
Model number:
Serial number:
2007/12/19 22:40:41
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
The caution marking is located on the rear of the cabinet.
Laser Safety
This unit employs a laser. Only a qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this device,
due to possible eye injury.
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
CAUTION: VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
LOCATION: INSIDE, NEAR THE DECK MECHANISM.
FCC WARNING- This equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this
equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the manual. The
user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.
RADIO-TV INTERFERENCE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2) Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
3) Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
4) Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.
A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING
This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance
with your local recycling regulations.
Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local regulations
concerning chemical wastes.
Make your contribution to the environment!!!
• Used up batteries do not belong in the dust bin.
• You can dispose of them at a collection point for used up batteries or special waste.
Contact your council for details.
2
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 2
2007/12/18 17:09:29
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
22. If the apparatus should emit smoke or an unusual odor,
immediately disconnect the power cord from the wall
outlet. Wait until the smoke or smell stops, then ask your
dealer for a check and repair. Neglecting to do so may
cause fire.
23. During thunderstorms, do not touch the connecting
cables or the apparatus.
24.
DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
25. Always make sure the antenna system is properly
grounded to provide adequate protection against
voltage surges and built-up static charges (see Section
810 of the National Electric Code).
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
15. Do not overload wall outlets; extension cords, or integral
convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire
or electric shock.
ANTENNA
LEAD
WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A
VCR Function
16. Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing or
place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item
filled with liquid, or candles on top of the unit.
17. Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing.
Neglecting to do so may cause serious personal injury.
Function Setup
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Editing
13. Unplug this apparatus and disconnect the antenna or
cable system during lightning storms or when unused
for long periods of time.
• Use extreme care to make sure you are never in a
position where your body (or any item you are in
contact with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can
accidentally touch overhead power lines. Never locate
the antenna near overhead power lines or other
electrical circuits.
• Never attempt to install any of the following during
lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,
wires, or any home theater component connected to an
antenna or phone system.
Playback
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury
from tip-over.
Recording
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
21. Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These
discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal
injury and apparatus malfunction.
Disc
Management
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
20. Never block or cover the slots or openings in the unit.
Never place the unit:
• on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;
• too close to drapes, curtains, or walls; or
• in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet,
or any other place with poor ventilation.
The slots and openings are provided to protect the unit
from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation.
Basic Setup
4. Follow all instructions.
19. Do not place the apparatus on amplifiers or equipment
that may produce heat.
Connections
This unit has been designed and manufactured to assure personal safety. Improper use can result in electric shock or fire hazard.
The safeguards incorporated in this unit will protect you if you observe the following procedures for installation, use and
servicing. This unit is fully transistorized and does not contain any parts that can be repaired by the user.
DO NOT REMOVE THE CABINET COVER, OR YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO DANGEROUS VOLTAGE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY.
Introduction
PRECAUTIONS
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMP
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
18. Do not place anything on top of this unit.
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 3
3
2007/12/18 17:09:31
PRECAUTIONS
Installation Location
For safety and optimum performance of this unit:
• Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do
not place anything directly on top of the unit. Do not
place the unit directly on top of the TV.
• Shield it from direct sunlight and keep it away from
devices of intense heat. Avoid dusty or humid places.
Avoid places with insufficient ventilation for proper
heat dissipation. Do not block the ventilation holes on
the sides of the unit. Avoid locations subject to strong
vibration or strong magnetic fields.
Supplied Accessories
remote control with batteries (AAx2)
RCA audio/video cables
Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it
from AC outlet. Grasp it by the plug.
• If, by accident, water is spilled on this unit, unplug
the power cord immediately and take the unit to our
Authorized Service Center for servicing.
owner’s manual
OWNER’S MANUAL
Moisture Condensation Warning
Moisture condensation may occur inside the unit when it
is moved from a cold place to a warm place or after
heating a cold room or under conditions of high
humidity. Do not use this unit at least for 2 hours until its
inside gets dry.
quick setup guide
About Copyright
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision
of television programs, videotapes, DVDs and other
materials, is prohibited under the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries, and may subject you
to civil and/or criminal liability.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized
by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
return stop sheet
Notice for Progressive Scan Output
Consumers should note that not all high definition
television sets are fully compatible with this product and
may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case
of picture problems with 480 progressive scan output, it
is recommended that the user switch the connection to
the “standard definition” output. If there are questions
regarding your TV set compatibility with this 480p DVD
recorder, please contact Toshiba Customer Service.
4
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 4
2007/12/18 17:09:31
Maintenance
Servicing
Cleaning Discs
Cleaning the Disc Lens
Disc Handling
Auto Head Cleaning
Manufactured under license under U.S.
Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered
trademarks and the DTS logos and
Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
©1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and HighDefinition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing
LLC.
Function Setup
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used
under license.
VCR Function
• Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or
remove a cassette, so you can see a clear picture.
• Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted
while the TV program reception is clear. Dirt accumulated
on the video heads after a long period of use, or the
usage of rental or worn tapes can cause this problem. If
a streaky or snowy picture appears during playback, the
video heads in your unit may need to be cleaned.
1. Please visit your local Audio/Video store and purchase a
good quality VHS video head cleaner.
2. If a video head cleaner does not solve the problem,
please consult your dealer or an Authorized Service
Center.
“Dolby® Digital Recording enables consumers to record
high-quality video with stereo sound on recordable DVD
discs. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM
recording, also saves recordable disc space, allowing for
higher video resolution or extended recording time on
each DVD. DVDs created using Dolby Digital Recording
will play back on all DVD-video players.”
Note: This is true when the players are compatible with
actual recordable DVD discs.
Editing
• Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not
adhere to the surfaces of the discs.
• Always store the disc in its protective case when it is
not used.
Dolby Digital Recording
Playback
• If this unit still does not perform properly although you
refer to the relevant sections and to
“TROUBLESHOOTING” in this owner’s manual, the laser
optical pickup unit may be dirty. Consult your dealer or
an Authorized Service Center for inspection and
cleaning of the laser optical pickup unit.
Recording
• When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning
cloth. Wipe the disc from the center to out. Do not
wipe in a circular motion.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,
commercially available cleaners, detergent, abrasive
cleaning agents or antistatic spray intended for analog
records.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Disc
Management
• Wipe the front panel and other exterior surfaces of the
unit with a soft, slightly damp cloth.
• Never use a solvent, thinner, benzene or alcohol to
clean the unit. Do not spray insecticide liquid near the
unit. Such chemicals may discolor the surface or
damage the unit.
Basic Setup
Cleaning the Cabinet
If the remote control does not work properly, you can test if
the remote control sends out the infrared signal with AM
radio or a digital camera (including built-in camera of cellular
phone). It will help to define the cause of malfunction.
• With an AM radio:
Tune an AM radio to a station with no
broadcasting. Press a button on remote
control toward the radio. Sound will be
fluttering when you press any key and the
radio receives the signal. This means the
remote control is working.
• With a digital camera (including built-in camera of
cellular phone):
Direct a digital camera to remote control,
press and hold a button on remote control. If
infrared light appears through digital camera,
the remote control is working.
Connections
• Please refer to relevant topics on “TROUBLESHOOTING”
on pages 102-105 before returning the product.
• If you need to call a customer service representative,
please know the model number and serial number of
your product before you call. This information is
displayed on the back of the product. Also, please take
a moment to identify the problem you are having, and
be prepared to explain this to the representative. If you
believe the representative will need to help you with
operations, please stay near the product. Our
representatives will be happy to assist you.
IR Signal Check
Introduction
PRECAUTIONS
“WMA” (Windows Media Audio) is a new audio codec
developed by Microsoft® in the United States of America.
Note
Others
• Remember to read the instructions along with the
video head cleaner before use.
• Clean video heads only when problems occur.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 5
5
2007/12/18 17:09:32
CONTENTS
Introduction
Recording
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Symbols Used in this Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installing the Batteries in the Remote Control . . . . . . 12
Using a Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
THE VCR / DVD RECORDER SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . 14
GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS . . . . 15
On-Screen Display / Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
INFORMATION ON DVD RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions on Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTINGS FOR A RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Recording Compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting for Auto Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Audio Select (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Aspect Ratio for Video Mode Recording . . . .
BASIC RECORDING &
ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMER RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hints for Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SATELLITE LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTINGS FOR AN EXTERNAL DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to an External Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV DUBBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide to DV and On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC to DVD Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC to VCR Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVD/VCR DUBBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections
CONNECTION TO AN EXTERNAL TUNER. . . . . . . . . . .
SETTINGS FOR THE VIDEO INPUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION TO A TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION TO A TV WITH AN HDMI™
COMPATIBLE PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION TO AN AUDIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
20
21
22
24
Basic Setup
INITIAL SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SETTING THE CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Disc Management
FORMATTING A DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing the Recording Format of a Brand-New
DVD-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reformatting a Disc Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING A DISC TO PROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS . . . . .
Auto Finalizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finalizing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
27
27
28
29
30
30
31
33
33
33
34
34
34
35
35
36
38
41
42
44
44
45
46
46
47
48
49
Playback
INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure of Disc Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BASIC PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playback from the Title List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing Back an Audio CD and a CD-RW/-R
with MP3/WMA/JPEG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing Back a DivX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Title/Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
51
52
52
53
54
55
57
57
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 6
2007/12/18 17:09:33
LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DivX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
87
87
91
94
95
96
98
VCR Function
Disc
Management
VCR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Index Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Time Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Recording
Others
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
LANGUAGE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Playback
65
65
65
66
66
67
67
67
68
68
68
69
Function Setup
Basic Setup
58
58
58
58
59
59
59
60
60
61
62
63
63
63
64
Connections
SPECIAL PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resume Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skipping TV Commercials During Playback. . . . . . . . .
Rapid Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step by Step Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slow Forward / Slow Reverse Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chasing Playback during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Playback and Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title/Chapter Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPEAT/RANDOM/PROGRAM PLAYBACK/
SLIDE SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Random Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO . .
Switching Subtitles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Audio Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Virtual Surround System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Camera Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing Block Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Black Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction
CONTENTS
Editing
70
70
70
71
73
73
74
75
75
77
78
79
81
82
83
84
Editing
Function Setup
INFORMATION ON DISC EDITING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide to a Title List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETING TITLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREATING/DELETING PLAYLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Titles to a Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing All Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDITING DISCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Putting Names on Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Chapter Marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hiding Chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Part of a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dividing a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combining Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting or Releasing the Title Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting or Clearing All Chapter Marks at Once. . . . . .
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 7
7
2007/12/18 17:09:34
FEATURES
This unit not only plays back DVD, CD and cassette tape but also offers features for you to record on DVD/cassette tape and
edit them after that. The following features are offered with this unit.
Recording
DVD mode VCR mode
This unit is compatible with recording on DVD-RW which is
recordable repeatedly and DVD-R which accept the additional
recordings until the disc becomes full but not overwritable.
Also, this unit allows you to record to the cassette tape.
Up to 12 program recording:
You can program the unit to record up to 12 programs,
within a month in advance. Daily or weekly program
recordings are also available.
One-touch timer recording (OTR):
You can easily set a recording time as you prefer. Every time
[REC I] is pressed during recording, the recording time will
be increased by 30 minutes up to 8 hours. The recording
automatically stops when the recording time you set is
reached.
Dubbing mode:
You can copy a DVD to a cassette tape or copy a cassette
tape to a DVD. This function will be possible only if the DVD
or a cassette tape is not copy protected. You cannot record on
a cassette tape when its erase-protection tab is removed.
DV dubbing:
This function helps you to easily dub the contents of the DVC
(digital video camcorder) to DVD, and DV (digital video) to VCR.
Left channel stereo recording:
This unit can record the sound of the left channel monaural
input as left and right channels automatically (the input
from the L2 jacks only).
DVD mode
Automatic chapter mark setting:
Chapter marks will be put on recordings as you set before
attempting to record.
Automatic title menu making:
The unit creates title menu automatically when finalizing discs.
Automatic playlist making:
The unit creates a playlist automatically after recording VR
mode DVD-RW.
Automatic title finalizing:
For video mode DVD-RW/-R and DVD+R recording, you can
finalize discs automatically after finishing all timer recordings
or at the end of the disc space if you set this in the main menu.
Playback
DVD mode
Theater surround sound in your home:
When connecting the unit to an amplifier or a decoder which is
compatible with Dolby Digital or DTS, you can experience the
theater surround sound from discs with surround sound system.
Quick search for what you want to watch:
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the
search function. Search for a desired point on a disc by title,
chapter/track or time.
Virtual surround system:
You can enjoy stereophonic space through your existing 2
channel stereo system.
Playing back on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files:
You can enjoy MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files which are
recorded on CD-RW/-R.
DivX® files can also be recorded on DVD-RW/-R and DVD+RW/+R.
VCR mode
Quick search for what you want to watch:
You can go to a specific point on a cassette tape by entering
the exact amount of time you wish to skip.
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the index
search/time search functions. An index mark will be assigned
at the beginning of each recording you make. For time search
function, you can go to a specific point on a cassette tape by
entering the exact amount of time you wish to skip.
Editing
DVD mode
Deleting titles:
You can delete titles which you do not need anymore.
8
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 8
Setting or clearing chapter marks:
You can set or clear chapter marks on titles.
Hiding chapters:
To keep others from playing back some chapters without
permission, you can hide chapters.
Deleting parts of titles:
You can delete a specific part of a title.
Dividing or combining titles:
You can divide or combine a title.
Editing title names:
You can change the title name you prefer.
Compatibility
DVD mode
Available for playing back discs on a regular DVD player:
Recorded discs can be played back on regular DVD players,
including computer DVD drives compatible with DVD-video
playback. Although DVD+RW/+R are playable on other units
without finalization in most cases, it is recommended to
finalize in order to stabilize the performance.
Others
DVD mode VCR mode
Line through output
When an external device such as cable/satellite box is
connected to L1(Rear) jacks of this unit, the signal from the
external device can be output even when the power of the
unit is off.
DVD mode
Progressive scan system
Unlike conventional interlace scanning, the progressive scan
system provides less flickering and images in higher
resolution than that of traditional television signals.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
You can enjoy clearer audio/video output when connecting
this unit to a display device with an HDMI-compatible port.
Symbols Used in this Owner’s Manual
To specify for what disc type each function is, we put the
following symbols at the beginning of each item to operate.
Symbol Description
For Recording, Playing Back, and Editing
Description refers to DVD-RW in video mode
Description refers to DVD-RW in VR mode
Description refers to DVD-R in video mode
Description refers to DVD+RW
Description refers to DVD+R
Description refers to VHS tapes
Use only cassettes marked VHS (
).
For Playback only
Description refers to DVD-video
Description refers to audio CD
Description refers to CD-RW/-R with MP3 files
Description refers to CD-RW/-R with WMA files
Description refers to CD-RW/-R with JPEG files
Description refers to DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R
and CD-RW/-R with DivX® files
If you do not find any of the symbols listed above under the
function heading, the operation is applicable to all media.
2007/12/18 17:09:34
Introduction
FEATURES
Discs for Recording, Playing back
Disc type
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD+RW
DVD+R
Format
Can be formatted in VR or video
mode
Video Mode
Automatically
formatted in
video mode
Automatically
formatted in
+VR mode
Automatically
formatted in
+VR mode
480 min (12cm)
144 min (8cm)
480 min (12cm)
144 min (8cm)
480 min (12cm)
144 min (8cm)
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0/4×
Ver.2.0/8×
Ver2.0/16×
1×-4×
1×-16×
Playable on
most DVD
players.
Finalization
necessary.
(title menu will
be created)
Playable on
DVD+RW
compatible
players.
Finalization
recommended.
(title menu will
be created)
Playable on
most DVD
players.
Finalization
recommended.
(title menu will
be created)
Connections
Logo
VR Mode
Maximum record 480 min (12cm)
time 144 min (8cm)
480 min (12cm)
144 min (8cm)
Playable only
on VR mode
compatible unit.
Finalization
recommended.
Recording
Playable on
most DVD
players.
Compatibility Finalization
necessary.
(title menu will
be created)
Disc
Management
Ver.1.1,1.2
Recordable/playable
Ver.1.1/2× CPRM compatible
versions
Ver.1.2/4× CPRM compatible
Basic Setup
Icon
Record TV
programs
✓
✓
Reuse by deleting
the current
contents
✓
✓
Record 16:9 size
pictures
✓
✓
Record copy-once
programs
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Playlist Original
✓
✓
✓
Create chapters
wherever you like
(chapter mark)
✓
✓
Divide a title
✓
Combine titles
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Create a
playlist
✓
Protect a title
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
VCR Function
Hide chapters
✓
Function Setup
✓
Scene delete
Delete a title
✓
✓*
Editing Features
Edit title name
✓
Editing
Create chapters
at fixed intervals
(auto chapter)
✓
Playback
Available Features
Recording Features
Others
✓: Available
Gray: Not available
*CPRM compatible disc only.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 9
9
2007/12/18 17:09:34
FEATURES
Discs for playing back
Disc Type
DVD-VIDEO
CD-DA
CD-RW
CD-R
Logo
Icon
Files for playing back
Type of title
Recording/Playing back
MP3
WMA
JPEG
DivX®
VCR
CD-RW/-R
CD-RW/-R
CD-RW/-R
CD-RW/-R
DVD-RW/-R
DVD+RW/+R
Cassette Tape
Icon
Media
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
• Official DivX® Certified product
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with
standard playback of DivX® media files
• Discs containing the DivX® files with the DivX® GMC (Global
Motion Compensation) playback feature, which is DivX®
supplemental function, cannot be played back on this unit.
* This unit cannot play back the disc contents protected
by Windows Media Digital Rights Management (DRM).
Unplayable Discs
The following discs will not play back on this unit.
• CD-ROM
• Compact Disc-Interactive (CD-I)
• Video Single Disc (VSD) • DVD-ROM
• DVD-audio
• Unfinalized disc
• DVD contains MP3, WMA or JPEG files
• DVD-RW/-R recorded in non compatible recording format
• Blu-ray Disc
• HD DVD
On the following disc, the sound may not be heard.
• Super audio CD - Only the sound on the CD layer can be
heard. The sound on the high-density super audio CD
layer cannot be heard.
Color Systems
DVD is recorded in different color systems throughout
the world. The most common color system is NTSC
(which is used primarily in the United States and Canada).
This unit uses NTSC, so DVD you play back must be
recorded in the NTSC system. You cannot play back DVD
recorded in other color systems.
Region Codes
This unit has been designed to play back DVD
with region 1. DVD must be labeled for ALL
regions or for region 1 in order to play back on
the unit. You cannot play back DVD that are
labeled for other regions. Look for the symbols
on the right on your DVD. If these region
symbols do not appear on your DVD, you cannot
play back the DVD in this unit.
10
The number inside the globe refers to region of the world.
A DVD labeled for a specific region can only play back on
the unit with the same region code.
Following discs are recommended for good recording
quality and are proven to be compatible with this unit.
However, depending on the media condition, the unit
may not read the disc properly.
Verbatim DVD+R 8x, DVD+RW 4x, DVD-R 8x, DVD-RW 2x
JVC
DVD-RW 4x
Maxell
DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, DVD-R 8x/16x
SONY
DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, DVD+RW 4x
TDK
DVD+R 4x/8x/16x
Performance of any other discs are not guaranteed.
• Toshiba is not liable for any damage or loss caused directly
or indirectly by the malfunction of this recorder, including,
without limitation, any one of the following:
• Failure to record contents intended to be recorded by
the consumer.
• Failure to edit contents as intended by the consumer.
• When a DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R disc created on this
recorder is used (e.g., insertion, playback, recording or
editing) in another DVD player, recorder or personal
computer drive.
• When a DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R disc that is used in
the manner described in the immediately preceding
bullet point is used again in this recorder.
• When a DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R disc that was
recorded in another DVD recorder, or in a personal
computer drive is used in this recorder.
• Some functions may not work with personal computer
discs.
• Discs recorded in this recorder may not operate as
expected on other DVD players, recorders or personal
computer drives.
Because of problems and errors that can occur during the
creation of DVD and CD software and/or the manufacture
of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that this DVD
Video Recorder will successfully play every disc bearing the
DVD and CD logos. If you happen to experience any
difficulty playing a DVD and/or CD disc on this DVD Video
Recorder, please contact Toshiba Customer Service.
DVD players with
recorded in VR mode.
are capable of playing DVD-RW
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 10
2007/12/18 17:09:36
Introduction
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
Front Panel
1
2
14
4
5
6
7
(*) The unit can also be
turned on by pressing
these buttons or by
inserting a cassette tape.
13 12 11 10 9* 8
Recording
Playback
1
Disc
Management
Rear Panel
Basic Setup
14. TRACKING
/
buttons (VCR)
Press to adjust the tracking during playback or in slow
motion of the cassette tape.
While playback is in still mode, you can stabilize the picture.
15. Display
Refer to “FRONT PANEL DISPLAY GUIDE” on page 18.
16. Infrared sensor window (DVD/VCR)
Receive signals from your remote control so that you can
control the unit from a distance.
17. I REC button (VCR)
Press once to start a recording. Press repeatedly to start the
one-touch timer recording.
18. B PLAY button (VCR)
Press to start playback.
19. A EJECT / C STOP button (VCR)
A EJECT button
When the unit is in stop mode, press to remove the cassette
tape from the cassette compartment.
C STOP button
Press to stop cassette tape playback or recording.
Press to stop the proceeding timer recording in VCR.
20. D FWD button (VCR)
Press to rapidly advance the cassette tape, or view the
picture rapidly in forward during playback (forward search).
21. E REW button (VCR)
Press to rewind the cassette tape, or to view the picture
rapidly in reverse during playback (rewind search).
Connections
21 20 19 18 17 16 15
1. I/y ON/STANDBY button (DVD/VCR)
Press to turn on and off the unit.
2. Cassette compartment (VCR)
Insert a cassette tape here.
3. A OPEN/CLOSE button (DVD)*
Press to open or close the disc tray.
4. Disc tray (DVD)
Place a disc when it is open.
5. VIDEO input jack (L2) (DVD/VCR)
Use to connect external device with an RCA video cable.
6. AUDIO input jacks (L2) (DVD/VCR)
Use to connect external device with an RCA audio cable.
7. DV input jack (L3) (DVD/VCR)
Use to connect the DV output of external device with a DV cable.
8. I REC button (DVD)
Press once to start a recording.
Press repeatedly to start the one-touch timer recording.
9. B PLAY button (DVD)*
Press to start or resume playback.
10. C STOP button (DVD)
Press to stop playback or recording.
Press to stop the proceeding timer recording in DVD.
11. VCR/DVD indicator
Lights up when the VCR/DVD output mode is selected.
12. VCR/DVD button (DVD/VCR)
Press to select the component you wish to operate.
13. DUBBING button (DVD/VCR)
Press to start VCR to DVD (DVD to VCR) duplication which
you set in the main menu.
3*
2
HDMI OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
L
OUT
PB
/CB
COAXIAL
L
R
PR
/CR
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
Note
Others
• Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear
panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent
damage to the unit.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 11
VCR Function
8. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (DVD only)
Use to connect a TV monitor with component video inputs
with a component video cable.
9. S-VIDEO OUT jack (DVD only)
Use to connect the S-video input of a TV monitor, AV receiver
or other device with an S-video cable.
10. AUDIO OUT jacks (DVD only)
Use to connect a TV monitor, AV receiver or other device
with an RCA audio cable.
11. COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack (DVD only)
Use to connect an AV receiver, Dolby Digital decoder or
other device with a coaxial digital input jack with a digital
coaxial cable.
Function Setup
1. AC Power Cord (DVD/VCR)
Connect to a standard AC outlet to supply power to this unit.
2. HDMI OUT jack (DVD only)
Use an HDMI cable to connect to a display with an HDMI
compatible port.
3. AUDIO OUT jacks (DVD/VCR)
Use to connect a TV monitor, AV receiver or other device
with an RCA audio cable.
4. VIDEO OUT jack (DVD/VCR)
Use to connect a TV monitor, AV receiver or other device
with an RCA video cable.
5. VIDEO IN jack (L1) (DVD/VCR)
Use to connect external device with an RCA video cable.
6. AUDIO IN jacks (L1) (DVD/VCR)
Use to connect external device with an RCA audio cable.
7. S-VIDEO IN jack (L1) (DVD/VCR)
Use to connect the S-video output of external device with an
S-video cable.
L
R
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
R
11
IN
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
Editing
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
11
2007/12/18 17:09:38
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
Remote Control
Installing the Batteries in the Remote
Control
Install the batteries (AAx2) matching the polarity
indicated inside battery compartment of the remote
control.
1
Open the cover.
2
Insert batteries.
Using a Remote Control
Keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote
control and the infrared sensor window on the unit.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the infrared
sensor window of the unit.
• Remote control for different devices can interfere with
each other. Avoid using remote control for other device
located close to the unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote control.
• The maximum operable ranges from the unit are as
follows.
- Line of sight: approx. 23 feet (7m)
- Either side of the center:
approx. 23 feet (7m) within 30°
30˚
23feet (7m)
Make sure to match + and - on the batteries to
the marks indicated in the battery compartment.
3
30˚
23feet (7m)
23feet (7m)
16
1
Close the cover.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
17
2
18
3
19
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
20
SETUP
4
5
Caution:
Never throw batteries into a fire.
6
Note:
7
• Be sure to use AA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the
environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in
accordance with applicable laws and regulations.
• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if
the operating range becomes reduced, replace
batteries with new ones.
• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote
control, always replace both batteries with new ones.
Never mix battery types or use new and used
batteries in combination.
• Always remove batteries from remote control if they
are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for
an extended period of time. This will prevent battery
acid from leaking into the battery compartment.
12
DISPLAY
AUDIO
21
DISC MENU
TOP MENU
22
23
ENTER
CLEAR
24
RETURN
25
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
26
8
10
REV
PLAY
FWD
9
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
11
29
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
12
31
13
33
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
15
27
28
14
ZOOM
30
32
34
35
36
SE-R0295
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 12
2007/12/18 17:09:39
Basic Setup
Disc
Management
Recording
Playback
Editing
Function Setup
VCR Function
Note
• If you turn off this unit, [OPEN/CLOSE A] on the remote
control is not available.
Be sure to use [OPEN/CLOSE A] or [STOP C / EJECT A]
on the unit.
EN
Others
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 13
18. TRACKING
/
buttons (VCR)
• Press to adjust the tracking during playback or in
slow motion of the cassette tape.
• While playback is in still mode, you can stabilize the
picture.
19. SAT.LINK button
• Press to call up the Satellite Link setting.
20. TIMER PROG. button
• Press to display the timer programming list.
21. AUDIO
button
DVD mode:
• During playback, press to display the audio menu.
VCR mode:
• During the playing of a HiFi video tape, press to
change the audio out setting to HiFi or mono.
22. DISPLAY button
• Press to display the display menu on or off.
23. TOP MENU button (DVD)
• Press to display the title list.
24. ENTER button
• Press to confirm or select menu items.
25. RETURN button
• Press to return to the previous displayed menu screen.
26. TIME SLIP button (DVD)
• Press once to start recording the TV program you
are watching. Press again to watch the content
being recorded from the beginning while recording
continues. (VR mode DVD-RW with the recording
mode of LP, EP or SLP only)
27. 1.3x/0.8x PLAY button (DVD)
• During playback, press to play back in a slightly
faster/slower speed while keeping the sound output.
28. FWD D button
DVD mode:
• During playback, press to fast forward playback.
• When playback is in pause, press to slow forward playback.
VCR mode:
• During playback, press to view the picture rapidly in
forward.
• Press to fast forward the cassette tape in stop mode.
• When playback is paused, press to view the cassette
tape in slow motion.
29. SKIP G button (DVD)
• During playback, press to skip to the next chapter,
track or file.
• When playback is in pause, press repeatedly to
forward the playback step by step.
30. STOP C button
• Press to stop playback or recording.
DVD mode:
• Press to exit from the title list.
31. DVD button
• Press to select the DVD output mode.
32. VCR button
• Press to select the VCR output mode.
33. REC I button
• Press once to start a recording.
• Press repeatedly to start the one-touch timer recording.
34. REC MODE button
• Press to switch the recording mode.
35. ZOOM button (DVD)
• During playback, press to enlarge the picture on the
TV screen.
36. SEARCH button (VCR)
• Press to call up the index or time search menu.
Connections
1. INPUT SELECT button
• Press to select the appropriate input.
2. OPEN/CLOSE A button
DVD mode:
• Press to open or close the disc tray.
VCR mode:
• Press to remove the cassette tape from the cassette
compartment.
3. Number/Character buttons
• Press to enter values for the settings in the main menu.
DVD mode:
• Press to select a title/chapter/track/file on display.
• Press to enter title names.
VCR mode:
• Press to start the index/time search.
4. SETUP button
• Press to display the main menu.
• During DVD playback, press and hold for more than
3 seconds to switch the progressive scanning mode
to the interlace mode.
5. DISC MENU button (DVD)
• Press to display the disc menu. To change original
and playlist on the TV screen.
6. Cursor K / L / { / B buttons
• Press to select items or settings.
7. CLEAR button
DVD mode:
• Press to clear the password once entered, to cancel
the programming for CD, to clear the selecting
marker number in the display menu, etc.
VCR mode:
• Press to reset the tape counter.
8. INSTANT SKIP button (DVD)
• During playback, press to skip 30 seconds.
9. REV E button
DVD mode:
• During playback, press to fast reverse playback.
• When playback is in pause, press to slow reverse playback.
VCR mode:
• During playback, press to view the picture rapidly in
reverse.
• Press to fast reverse the cassette tape in stop mode.
10. PLAY B button
• Press to start playback or resume playback.
11. SKIP H button (DVD)
• During playback, press to return to the beginning of
the current chapter, track or file.
• During playback, press twice in quick succession to
skip to the previous chapter or track.
• When playback is in pause, press repeatedly to
reverse the playback step by step.
12. PAUSE F button
• Press to pause playback or recording.
13. DUBBING button
• Press to start VCR to DVD (DVD to VCR) duplication
which you set in the main menu.
14. REPEAT button
DVD mode:
• Press to select the repeat mode.
VCR mode:
• Press to set or release the Auto Repeat Playback. In
the Auto Repeat Playback mode, tape is played to its
end, the tape will rewind to the beginning and start
playback itself.
15. TIMER SET button
• Press to set the unit in the timer standby mode. In
the timer standby mode, press to cancel the mode
and to turn the unit on.
16. HDMI button (DVD)
• Press to set the HDMI connector’s video signal
output mode.
17. I/y ON/STANDBY button
• Press to turn the unit on and off.
Introduction
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
13
2007/12/19 13:45:28
THE VCR / DVD RECORDER SWITCHING
Because this product is a combination of a VCR and a DVD recorder, you must select first which component you wish
to operate with [VCR/DVD].
DVD mode
VCR mode
Press [DVD] on the remote control.
(Verify that the DVD indicator is lit.)
Press [VCR] on the remote control.
(Verify that the VCR indicator is lit.)
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
DISPLAY
AUDIO
HDMI
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISC MENU
DVD indicator
VCR indicator
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
SKIP
STOP
FWD
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
DVD button
VCR button
ZOOM
SE-R0295
Note
• You cannot switch to another mode (DVD or VCR) in the timer-standby mode.
14
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 14
2007/12/18 17:09:41
This unit uses the following on-screen displays and menus to guide you to the easy operations.
The on-screen displays give you the information on the loaded disc, the disc/file in playback, or the HDMI status, etc.
The menus allow you to change the various kinds of settings for playing back, recording, or editing to suit your preference.
Introduction
GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS
On-Screen Display / Menu
Connections
The on-screen display changes in the following order
as you press [DISPLAY].
Disc Information / Menu
5
DVD mode
2
OFF
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
-RW
Disc Information/Menu
1
7
3
SP
1:53
4
* This is an example screen only for explanation.
1. Indicates a disc type and format mode.
2. Indicates a type of titles for VR mode DVD-RW .
3. Indicates a selected external input mode.
4. Indicates a recording mode and possible recording
time left.
5. Indicates a title number, chapter number, elapsed time
and total time of disc playback.
6. Each icon means:
: Marker
: Audio
: Noise Reduction / Black Level
: Subtitle
: Zoom
: Angle
: Surround
Playback
: Search
: Repeat
7. Indicates an operation status.
1
12:00AM
0:00:00
HIFI
3
4
5
2
Function Setup
* This is an example screen only for explanation.
Indicates current video status.
Indicates the current time.
Indicates a recording or playing back mode.
Indicates a tape counter.
Audio status of the current cassette tape.
VCR Function
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SP
Editing
VCR mode
Recording
HDMI Information
(only for the images output through the HDMI output)
6
Disc
Management
MP3/WMA Tag Information
(only when a MP3 or WMA file is in playback)
ORG
L1
Basic Setup
Title Name Information
(only when DVD+RW/+R, VR mode DVD-RW/-R, or
unfinalized Video mode DVD-RW/-R is in playback)
or
File Name Information
(only when a CD with MP3/WMA/
JPEG/DivX® files is in playback)
VR
Note
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 15
Others
• In some descriptions on this manual, only one disc
type is indicated as an example.
15
2007/12/18 17:09:41
GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS
Title/File Name Information
HDMI Information
Title name information
1
2
Title Name
Video Info. :
Audio Info. :
My Title
480p
/
Bitstream
YCbCr
3
File name information
File Name
My File
4
MP3/WMA Tag Information
• First, track name will be displayed.
Track Name
*1. Indicates the resolution of the HDMI output image.
*2. Indicates the HDMI video format.
*3. Indicates the HDMI audio format.
4. Indicates current disc status.
* “- - -” will be displayed, when it does not have any
information.
• If you press [DISPLAY] one more time, artist name will
be displayed.
Artist Name
• If you press [DISPLAY] one more time, album name
will be displayed.
Album Name
• If there is no artist, track or album name, “Not Available”
will be displayed.
16
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 16
2007/12/18 17:09:42
Main Menu
Setup
General Setting
Timer Programming
Title List
DVD Menu
CD Playback Mode
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
1. Playback:
To set up the unit to play back discs as you prefer.
2. Display:
To set up the OSD screen as you prefer.
3. Video:
To set up the video setting.
4. Recording:
To set up the unit to record to discs as you prefer.
5. Clock:
To set up the clock of the unit as you need.
6. DivX:
To set up the setting for the DivX® playback.
7. HDMI:
To set up the HDMI connection setting.
8. Reset All:
To reset the setting to the factory default.
Recording
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
3
8
4
Disc
Management
General Setting Menu
Playback
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Delete All Playlists
CD Playback Mode
5
1
6
2
7
3
Random Play
Program Play
Slide Show
VCR Function
<CD Playback Mode menu>
Function Setup
1
2
3
4
1. Format (DVD-RW, DVD+RW only):
Allows you to format the disc.
2. Finalize:
Allows you to finalize a disc containing recorded titles.
3. Disc Protect (VR mode DVD-RW, DVD+RW/+R only):
Allows you to protect a disc from accidental editing or
recording.
4. Delete All Playlists (VR mode DVD-RW only):
Allows you to delete playlist.
5. Random Play:
Allows you to activate the random playback feature.
6. Program Play: (Audio CD only)
Allows you to activate the program playback feature.
7. Slide Show: (JPEG files only)
Allows you to select the display time of the slide show
mode.
Editing
DVD Menu / CD Playback Mode
<DVD Menu menu>
Basic Setup
1
2
3
4
5
1. General Setting:
To go to general setting menu.
2. Timer Programming:
To program a timer recording.
3. Title List:
To call up the title list.
4. DVD Menu:
To set up the DVD setting.
5. CD Playback Mode:
To set up the CD playback setting.
• “CD Playback Mode” is available only when an audio
CD, a CD-RW/-R with MP3 / WMA / JPEG / DivX® files is
inserted into the unit.
Connections
Press [SETUP] to display the main menu. Then use
[K / L] to select a menu and press [ENTER] to display the
menu. These menus provide entries to all main functions
of the unit.
Introduction
GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 17
17
2007/12/18 17:09:43
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY GUIDE
2
1
PM
BS CS
DR
CD
VCR
DB HDD
DVD
3
4
1.
PM
: Appears when this unit is in
DVD output mode and a disc
is in the unit.
: Appears during duplication
process.
: Appears in the afternoon with
the clock display.
2. Title / track and chapter mark
: Appears when indicating a
title / track number.
: Appears when this unit is in
VCR output mode and a
cassette tape is in the unit.
: Appears during duplication
process.
: Appears when indicating a
chapter number.
3. Current status of the unit
: Appears when playback is
paused.
: Appears when playing back a
disc.
: Appears when the timer
programming or OTR has
been set and is proceeding.
: Flashes when all timer
recordings have been
finished.
: Appears during recording
process.
: Flashes when a recording
pauses.
VCR
DVD
: Appears when this unit is in
DVD output mode.
: Appears when the timer
recording is proceeding in
DVD.
: Appears when DVD is in the
timer recording standby
mode.
: Flashes when a program
cannot be performed for
some reasons.
: Appears when this unit is in
VCR output mode.
DB : Appears during VCR to DVD
duplication process.
: Appears when the timer
:
Appears during DVD to VCR
recording is proceeding in VCR.
duplication
process.
: Appears when VCR is in the
timer recording standby mode. 4. Displays the following
: Flashes when a program
• Elapsed playback time
cannot be performed for
• Current title / chapter / track /file
some reasons.
number
• Recording time / remaining time
• Clock
• Selected external input position
• Remaining time for one-touch
timer recording
• Selected HDMI output mode
Display Message
18
Appears when the disc tray is
opening.
Appears when HDMI output
mode (480p) is selected.
Appears when the disc tray is
closing.
Appears when HDMI output
mode (720p) is selected.
Appears when a disc is loaded
on the disc tray.
Appears when HDMI output
mode (1080i) is selected.
Appears when data is being
recorded on a disc.
Appears when HDMI output
mode (1080p) is selected.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 18
2007/12/18 17:09:44
This section describes how to connect this unit to an external tuner such as cable/satellite box.
• When you change the connections, all devices should be turned off.
• Refer to the operation manual accompanying external devices for more information.
Disconnect the power cords of the devices from the AC outlet.
Connections
1
2
rear of your TV
disconnect
Make the connection as illustrated below.
e.g.)
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
R
rear of your TV
RF coaxial cable
S-VIDEO
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
ANT. IN
RCA audio
cable
L
RCA video cable
RF coaxial cable
S-VIDEO
OUT
HDMI OUT
IN
R
TV signal
R
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
S-VIDEO
PB
/CB
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO OUT
L
R
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
Y
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
Disc
Management
L
Basic Setup
L
Introduction
CONNECTION TO AN EXTERNAL TUNER
IN
L
L
R
R
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
PR
/CR
OUT
IN
or
rear of this unit
S-video cable
Recording
RCA video cable
external tuner
RCA audio cable
Note
Function Setup
3
rear of your TV
Plug in the power cords of the devices to the AC outlet.
connect
VCR Function
4
After making the connection as described above, make
sure to select the appropriate video input type by
following the steps in “SETTINGS FOR THE VIDEO INPUT”
on page 20.
Editing
• Required cables and connecting methods differ depending on the external tuner.
For more information, please contact your external tuner provider.
• Instead of using VIDEO OUT jack of this unit, you can also use S-VIDEO OUT jack, COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT
jack, or HDMI OUT jack (no AUDIO OUT jack connection required) for connecting to your TV.
With this setup:
• You can record any unscrambled channel by selecting the channel on the external tuner. Be sure that the external
tuner is turned on.
• Signal from the external tuner can be output only on CVBS output even when the power of the unit is off.
• You cannot record one channel while watching another channel.
Playback
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1
• RCA video cable x 1
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.
rear of this unit
HDMI OUT
Note to CATV system installer
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 19
Others
• This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the National Electrical
Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding - in particular, specifying that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as possible.
19
2007/12/18 17:09:46
SETTINGS FOR THE VIDEO INPUT
You must let the unit know which video input jack you are using before making a recording.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
1
2
3
4
5
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
Press [SETUP].
Use [K / L] to select “General
Setting”, then press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Video”, then
press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Select Video”,
then press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select the input jack
type to connect, then press [ENTER].
If you want to use VIDEO IN jack, select “Video
In”.
If you want to use S-VIDEO IN jack, select
“S-Video In”.
FWD
General Setting
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
SE-R0295
20
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Progressive
TV Aspect
Select Video
- L1 Video
(Rear)
Select
Video In
S-Video In
ZOOM
6
Press [SETUP] to exit.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 20
2007/12/18 17:09:47
Introduction
CONNECTION TO A TV
Make one of the following connections, depending on the capabilities of your existing device.
VCR and basic DVD connection
R
S-VIDEO
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
L
L
R
R
Basic Setup
this unit
RCA video
cable
VIDEO
IN
L
AUDIO IN
Connections
RCA audio
cable
TV
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
L
OUT
PB
/CB
COAXIAL
IN
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
L
L
R
R
IN
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
R
PR
/CR
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
Disc
Management
AUDIO OUT (DVD/VCR)
VIDEO OUT
Available for DVD only
Method 1
analog audio
Method 2
good picture
TV
better picture
S-VIDEO IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Recording
Y
(Green)
PB/CB
(Blue)
PR/CR
(Red)
R
L
AUDIO IN
or
and
this unit
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-video cable
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
OUT
OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
(Green)
Y
(Blue)
VIDEO OUT
Y
L
L
P
/C
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
Y
Y
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
component video cable
Playback
RCA audio cable
P
/C
OUT
PB
/CB
L
OUT
PB
/CB
R
PR
/CR
Note
R
S-VIDEO OUT
PR
/CR
(Red)
R
PR
/CR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUTPUT
To set progressive scan mode, refer to page 94
• This unit is compatible with the progressive scan system. The
feature provides you the higher quality images than the
traditional output system. To utilize this feature, you must
set “Progressive” to “ON”.
After you have completed the connections
• Switch the input selector on your TV to an appropriate
external input channel. Press a button on the TV’s
original remote control that selects an external input
channel until the DVD recorder’s opening picture
appears. Check your TV owner’s manual for details.
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 21
VCR Function
• If S-video cable is connected to the S-VIDEO OUT
jack, the picture from the VCR will not be displayed.
• Connect this unit directly to the TV. If the RCA audio/
video cables are connected to a VCR, pictures may be
distorted due to the copy protection system.
• You will not be able to hear the sound being output
from DVD if you are not connecting DVD AUDIO OUT
when you made either S-video or component video
out connection.
• Progressive signal will not be output from the
VIDEO OUT or S-VIDEO OUT jack.
PB
/CB
Function Setup
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1
• RCA video cable x 1
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your
local store.
OUT
Editing
AUDIO OUT (DVD)
L
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
21
2007/12/18 17:09:48
CONNECTION TO A TV WITH AN HDMI™ COMPATIBLE PORT
A simple 1-cable connection with a device having an HDMI (high-definition multimedia interface) connector allows
digital transfer of both digital video signals and multi-channel audio signals.
Available for DVD only
TV
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
HDMI OUT
this unit
When connecting with an HDMI cable, the audio signal will be output as the digital audio signal simultaneously, so
you do not need the analog audio connection described on page 21.
Cables not included.
Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store.
HDMI Mode and Actual Output Signals
Press [HDMI] to select the HDMI output mode. The output mode changes as follows every time [HDMI] is pressed.
Front Panel Display
Video Output Signal
480 Progressive
Press [HDMI]
720 Progressive
Press [HDMI]
1080 interlaced
Press [HDMI]
1080 Progressive
Press [HDMI]
• The HDMI mode that is not supported by display device will be skipped.
22
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 22
2007/12/18 17:09:49
Actual Output Modes by Media
Audio recording format of the disc
DVD-video
LPCM
Dolby Digital
DivX®
PCM
2channel PCM
Stream
Dolby Digital
PCM
Stream
2channel PCM
PCM
2channel PCM
Stream
Dolby Digital
PCM
Stream
Basic Setup
MP3 / MP2
Actual output
Connections
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital setting of this unit
Introduction
CONNECTION TO A TV WITH AN HDMI™ COMPATIBLE PORT
2channel PCM
For audio CD and MP3 / WMA files, 2 channel PCM will be output regardless of the “Dolby Digital” setting.
If the connected device is not compatible with HDMI BITSTREAM, audio will be output as PCM even if you select
“Stream” in “Dolby Digital” setting (Refer to page 89).
Note
Playback
Editing
• Because HDMI is an evolving technology, it is possible that some devices with an HDMI input may not operate
properly with this unit.
• When using an HDCP-incompatible display device, the image will not be viewed properly.
• Among the devices that support HDMI, some devices can control other devices via the HDMI connector; however,
this unit cannot be controlled by another device via the HDMI connector.
• The audio signals from the HDMI connector (including the sampling frequency, the number of channels and bit
length) maybe limited by the device that is connected.
• Among the monitors that support HDMI, some do not support audio output (for example, projectors). In
connections with device such as this unit, audio signals are not output from the HDMI output connector.
• When this unit’s HDMI connector is connected to a DVI-D compatible monitor (HDCP compatible) with an HDMIDVI converter cable, the signals are output in digital RGB.
• If the connected equipment is not compatible with HDMI BITSTREAM, DTS sound will not be output.
• When the power failure occurs, or when you unplug the unit, some problems in the HDMI setting might occur.
Please check and set the HDMI setting again.
Recording
*HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface
Disc
Management
Copyright protection system
To play back the digital video images of a DVD via an HDMI connection, it is necessary that both the player and the
display device (or an AV amplifier) support a copyright protection system called HDCP (high-bandwidth digital
content protection system). HDCP is copy protection technology that comprises data encryption and authentication
of the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP. Please read the operating instructions of your display device
(or AV amplifier) for more information.
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 23
23
2007/12/18 17:09:49
CONNECTION TO AN AUDIO SYSTEM
• When you change the connections, all devices should be turned off.
• Refer to the owner’s manual accompanying external devices for more information.
Digital Audio Connection
2 Channel Analog Audio Connection
stereo system
Dolby Digital decoder
audio
COAXIAL
R
digital audio
coaxial input
jack
L
AUDIO IN
analog audio
input jacks
or
RCA audio cable
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
Y
L
HDMI OUT
L
digital audio
coaxial cable
HDMI OUT
OUT
PB
/CB
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
L
OUT
PB
/CB
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
IN
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
L
L
R
R
R
IN
L
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
R
R
S-VIDEO
Y
PR
/CR
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
PB
/CB
PR
/CR
S-VIDEO
Y
L
COAXIAL
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
OUT
PB
/CB
IN
COAXIAL
L
L
R
R
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
R
R
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
PR
/CR
PR
/CR
this unit
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
AUDIO OUT
*MD deck or DAT deck can be also connected through coaxial jack.
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.
Multi Channel Digital Audio Setting
Setting
Connection
Setup >General Setting >Playback >Audio Out >
Dolby Digital
DTS
If output is Dolby Digital encoded audio, connect to
a Dolby Digital decoder.
Stream
OFF
If output is DTS encoded audio, connect to a DTS
decoder.
PCM
ON
If output is encoded audio for both Dolby Digital and
DTS, connect to the decoder which encodes multiple
audio sources.
Stream
ON
Connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck.
PCM
OFF
If not connected to any external devices.
PCM
OFF
* To complete these settings, refer to page 89.
Note
• The DVD AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks are only useful in DVD mode.
• The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital multi channel surround format cannot be recorded as digital sound
by an MD or DAT deck.
• By connecting this unit to a Dolby Digital decoder, you can enjoy high-quality Dolby Digital multi channel
surround sound as heard in the movie theaters.
• By connecting this unit to the DTS decoder, you can enjoy Multi-channel Surround System which reproduces the
original sound as truthfully as possible. Multi-channel Surround System is developed by the DTS, Inc.
• Playing back a DVD using incorrect settings may generate noise distortion and may also damage the speakers.
24
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 24
2007/12/18 17:09:49
Introduction
INITIAL SETTING
Turn on this unit for the first time, you need to follow these steps.
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
1
2
Before:
Turn the TV on. Select the input to
which the unit is connected.
Use [K / L] to select your desired
language, then press [ENTER] to set
language.
Basic Setup
INPUT
SELECT
Connections
OPEN/
CLOSE
Press [I/y
y ON/STANDBY].
Initial Setting
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
OSD Language
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
English
Français
Español
TOP MENU
Disc
Management
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
Initial Setting
Recording
REV
3
Press [ENTER] to activate “Clock
Setting”.
Clock Setting
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
SE-R0295
ZOOM
4
Proceed to step 3 in “Clock Setting”
on page 26.
Playback
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
--- / -- / ---- (---)
-- : -- --
Editing
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 25
25
2007/12/18 17:09:50
SETTING THE CLOCK
Set the clock before you try the timer programming.
Clock Setting
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
1
2
3
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to
select “General Setting”, then press
[ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Clock”, then
press [ENTER].
“Clock” menu will appear.
Use [K / L] to select calendar or time,
then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Clock Setting
Recording
JAN / 01 / 2008 ( TUE )
Clock
12 : 00 AM
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
DUBBING
VCR
REC MODE
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
4
Use [{ / B] to select an item to set,
and use [K / L] to select the contents
to suit your preference, then press
[ENTER].
General Setting
DVD
Playback
Display
Video
Clock Setting
Recording
JAN / 01 / 2008 ( TUE )
Clock
12 : 00 AM
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
REC
ZOOM
SE-R0295
Your setting will be activated.
The clock start counting when you press
[ENTER].
5
Press [SETUP] to exit.
Note
• Your clock setting will be lost if either there is a power
failure or this unit has been unplugged for more than
30 seconds.
• For setting the day, year, hour and minute,
[the Number buttons] can also be used.
• You can set the built-in calendar from the year 2007
up to 2057.
26
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 26
2007/12/18 17:09:51
Introduction
FORMATTING A DISC
Choosing the Recording Format of a Brand-New DVD-RW
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
1
2
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,
then press [ENTER].
Setup
General Setting
Disc
Management
INPUT
SELECT
Basic Setup
OPEN/
CLOSE
Press [SETUP].
Timer Programming
Title List
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
DVD Menu
3
Use [K / L] to select “Format”, then
press [ENTER].
4
Use [K / L] to select “Format Mode”,
then press [ENTER].
DVD Menu
Recording
Format
Finalize
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
SKIP
PLAY
FWD
STOP
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
ZOOM
SE-R0295
Press [SETUP] to exit.
Insert a brand-new disc.
Formatting will start.
Formatting
90%
VCR Function
Formatting is completed.
“100%” is indicated.
Others
• The recording format setting is effective only for
DVD-RW. You cannot change the recording format
for a DVD-R and DVD+RW/+R.
• You cannot mix two formats on one DVD-RW. If you
insert a disc that has been recorded before, the
recording format cannot be changed even if you
change it in the main menu.
Use [K / L] to select “Video mode” or
“VR mode”, then press [ENTER].
Function Setup
Note
5
6
7
8
Start
Format Mode
Editing
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
Playback
REV
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 27
Connections
When inserting a brand-new DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the unit automatically starts to initialize the disc. DVD+RW will
always be formatted in +VR mode, and DVD-RW will be formatted either video or VR mode according to the recording
format mode setting of the unit. Before insert a brand-new DVD-RW, you need to set the recording format to the
desired mode. You can also manually format a DVD-RW once it has been used.
27
2007/12/18 17:09:55
FORMATTING A DISC
Reformatting a Disc Manually
If you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, you can format the disc by performing “Format”. You can format DVD-RW for
either video mode recording or VR mode recording. DVD+RW can be format in order to erase all content of the disc.
Insert a recordable disc.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
1
2
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
Press [SETUP].
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,
then press [ENTER].
Setup
General Setting
Timer Programming
Title List
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
DVD Menu
3
RETURN
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Delete All Playlists
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
Use [K / L] to select “Format”, then
press [ENTER].
4
Use [K / L] to select “Start”, then
press [ENTER].
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Delete All Playlists
Start
Format Mode
Selection menu will appear and prompt you to
confirm.
• For DVD+RW, use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then
press [ENTER].
ZOOM
SE-R0295
5
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
Formatting will start.
If you want to cancel formatting, select “No”.
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Start
Disc Protect OFF ON
Format Mode
Are you sure?
Delete All Playlists
Yes
No
Note
• When you reformat the disc, the contents of the disc
are erased.
• For DVD-RW, make sure that the recording format is
set to the desired mode. (See steps 1 to 6 in
“Choosing the Recording Format of a Brand-New
DVD-RW” on page 27.)
28
6
Formatting is completed.
“100%” is indicated.
Formatting
100%
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 28
2007/12/18 17:09:56
To prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing the
titles, you can protect them from “DVD Menu” menu.
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Delete All Playlists
AUDIO
Disc
Management
SETUP
Use [K / L] to select “Disc Protect
OFF ON”, then press [ENTER].
DVD Menu
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,
then press [ENTER].
Basic Setup
INPUT
SELECT
Press [SETUP].
Connections
OPEN/
CLOSE
1
2
3
Introduction
SETTING A DISC TO PROTECT
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
REV
PLAY
SKIP
FWD
STOP
SKIP
4
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Protect this disc?
Delete All Playlist
Recording
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
Yes
No
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
A disc will be protected.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Editing
SE-R0295
Playback
PAUSE
Function Setup
Note
VCR Function
To cancel the disc protect:
• When you insert a disc protected with this unit,
“Disc Protect ON OFF” will appear instead of “OFF
ON”.
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect ON
OFF
Delete All Playlists
Others
To release the protection for the disc, select “Disc
Protect ON OFF” at step 3, then follow rest of the
procedures.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 29
29
2007/12/18 17:09:58
PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS
Auto Finalizing
You can finalize discs automatically using this function.
You can use this function to finalize discs after finishing
all timer recordings and at the end of the disc space.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to
select “General Setting”, then press
[ENTER].
“General Setting” menu will appear.
Use [K / L] to select “Recording”,
then press [ENTER].
“Recording” menu will appear.
Use [K / L] to select “Auto Finalize”,
then press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Disc Full” or
“End of Timer Rec”, then press
[ENTER].
General Setting
DISC MENU
TOP MENU
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
Auto Chapter
Recording Audio Select (XP)
Auto Finalize
Auto Finalize
Disc Full Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
End of Timer
Rec Mode
Dubbing
Make Recording Compatible
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
DUBBING
VCR
REC MODE
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
DVD
5
REC
ZOOM
Use [K / L] to select “ON”, then press
[ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Auto Chapter
Recording Audio Select (XP)
AutoFull
Finalize
Disc
Auto Finalize
Disc
Full Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
ON
EndOFF
of Timer
Rec Mode
Dubbing
Make Recording Compatible
SE-R0295
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Auto Chapter
Audio Select (XP)
End
TimerRecording
Rec
AutoofFinalize
Auto Finalize
ON
Disc
Full Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
EndOFF
of Timer
Rec Mode
Dubbing
Make Recording Compatible
Your setting will be activated.
6
30
Press [SETUP] to exit.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 30
2007/12/18 17:10:00
Introduction
PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS
Finalizing a Disc
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
Use [K / L] to select “Finalize”, then
press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Finalize disc?
Delete All Playlist
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
“DVD Menu“ menu will appear.
Disc
Management
INPUT
SELECT
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,
then press [ENTER].
Basic Setup
OPEN/
CLOSE
1
2
3
4
Press [SETUP].
Connections
You will need to finalize discs to play back on other DVD
players.
Finalizing may take several minutes up to an hour.
Since the process of the finalization fills empty space of
the disc, a shorter recording period on the disc will
require a longer time period for finalization. Do not
unplug the power cord during finalization.
Yes
No
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
Recording
SETUP
TOP MENU
Finalizing will start.
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
Playback
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
5
Finalizing is completed.
Function Setup
SE-R0295
ZOOM
90%
Editing
PAUSE
Finalizing
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 31
31
2007/12/18 17:10:01
PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS
Note
• Finalizing a disc in video mode and +VR mode
automatically creates a title menu.
• After you finalize the DVD+RW, you can call up the
title list by pressing [TOP MENU], or you can call up
the title menu by pressing [DISC MENU].
• Even after DVD+RW is finalized, you can still record
or edit. After you finalize DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R, you
cannot edit or record anything else on that disc.
• If you insert a DVD-RW finalized with this unit, “Undo
Finalization” will appear instead of “Finalize” at
step 3.
• To release the finalization of the DVD-RW disc, select
“Undo Finalization” at step 3.
DVD Menu
Format
Undo Finalization
Disc Protect OFF
Delete All Playlists
ON
To cancel finalizing...
(DVD-RW only)
Press [STOP C] during the finalizing is in progress. Use
[K / L] to select “Yes”, then press [ENTER]. Finalizing is
canceled and the unit switches to stop mode.
Do you want to cancel ?
Yes
No
Finalizing
5%
If “ ” appears when [STOP C] is pressed, you cannot
cancel finalizing because the finalizing has already
reached at a critical point in its process.
If “No” is selected and [ENTER] or [RETURN] is pressed,
finalizing is continued.
You cannot cancel finalizing a DVD-R, DVD+R and
DVD+RW once it has started.
• To undo the finalization of the DVD+RW, make an
additional recording onto the disc.
• DO NOT power off during finalizing. This may result
in a malfunction.
• For DVD+RW, if you have added or deleted chapters,
or made chapters hidden, you must finalize the disc
before being able to see those effects on other units.
To play back discs other than DVD+RW on other DVD
players, you will need to finalize.
32
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 32
2007/12/18 17:10:03
Recording Mode
Restrictions on Recording
12cm
8cm
Video/
Sound Quality
60 min 18 min
120 min 36 min
240 min 72 min
360 min 108 min
480 min 144 min
Note
Recording
Playback
Editing
Function Setup
• This unit cannot record to CD-RW or CD-R.
• DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R and CD-RW/-R recorded on
a personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder may
not be played back if the disc is damaged or dirty or
if there is condensation on the player’s lens.
• If you record a disc using a personal computer, even
if it is recorded in a compatible format it may not be
played back because of the settings of the
application software used to create the disc. (Check
with the software publisher for more detailed
information.)
• Discs recorded in video mode on this unit cannot
record additional information using other DVD
recorders.
• It is not possible to use a DVD-RW/DVD+RW
formatted with this unit on other DVD recorder
unless the content of the disc was also recorded with
this unit.
• Since the recording is made by the VBR (variable bit
rate) method, depending on the picture you are
recording, the actual remaining time for recording
may be a little shorter than the remaining time
displayed on the TV screen.
Making discs playable in other DVD players (Finalize)
For DVD-RW/-R, it is necessary to finalize the disc after
recording, in order to play back the disc on other DVD
players. (Refer to pages 30-32.) For DVD+RW/+R, it is
recommended to finalize the disc in order to make the
disc more compatible to other DVD player. When video
and +VR mode disc are finalized, a title menu is created.
You cannot finalize discs in other DVD recorders.
Disc
Management
• The recording times listed above are estimates and are
for reference purposes only. Actual recording times may
vary.
• The audio and video quality of content being recorded
may differ depending on the recording mode/recording
time chosen.
What is “CPRM”?
CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system
regarding the recording of “copy-once” broadcast
programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for
Recordable Media.
This unit is CPRM compatible, which means that you can
record copy-once broadcast programs, but you cannot
make another copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings
can only be made on CPRM compatible DVD-RW formatted
in VR mode, and CPRM recordings can only be played back
on DVD players that are specifically compatible with CPRM.
Basic Setup
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
Recording time
You cannot record copy-protected program using this
unit. Copy-protected video signal is included in DVDvideos, some satellite broadcasts, some pay-per-view
stations and some “premium” stations.
If copy-protected material is detected, recording will
pause or stop automatically and an error message
appears on the screen.
“Copy-once only” video can only be recorded to CPRM
compatible DVD-RW formatted in VR mode.
Connections
You can select a recording mode among 5 options, and
the recording time will depend on the recording mode
you select as follows.
Recording mode
Introduction
INFORMATION ON DVD RECORDING
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 33
33
2007/12/18 17:10:03
SETTINGS FOR A RECORDING
Make Recording Compatible
Use this feature to make the discs recorded on other unit
recordable on this unit. When you make an additional
recording on this unit with “Make Recording Compatible”
set to “ON”, the title list is automatically converted to our
style.
1) Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to select “General
Setting”, then press [ENTER].
2) Use [K / L] to select “Recording”, then press
[ENTER].
“Recording” menu will appear.
Setting for Auto Chapter
You can set a specified time for chapter marks.
1) Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to select “General
Setting”, then press [ENTER].
2) Use [K / L] to select “Recording”, then press [ENTER].
“Recording” menu will appear.
3) Use [K / L] to select “Auto Chapter”, then press
[ENTER].
4) Use [K / L] to select a desired time option, then
press [ENTER].
3) Use [K / L] to select “Make Recording Compatible”,
then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
4) Use [K / L] to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press
[ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Auto Chapter
Recording
Audio Select (XP)
Make Recording
Compatible
Auto Finalize
ON
Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
OFF
Dubbing Mode
Make Recording Compatible
Auto Chapter
Recording Audio Select (XP)
Auto Chapter
Auto Finalize
OFF Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
5 minutes
Dubbing Mode
10 minutes
Make Recording Compatible
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
5) Press [SETUP] to exit.
Note
ON:
Title list will be replaced when you make
additional recordings to the discs recorded by
other units.
Prohibiting additional record to the disc that
has a title list created by other units.
OFF:
• The interval for auto chapter may be up to two
minutes different from the time option you set.
• A blank chapter may be created depending on the
remaining time of the disc.
5) Press [SETUP] to exit.
Note
• This function is also available for unfinalized DVD+R.
34
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 34
2007/12/18 17:10:05
Recording Audio Select (XP)
1) Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to select “General
Setting”, then press [ENTER].
3) Use [K / L] to select “Recording Audio Select (XP)”,
then press [ENTER].
You can set aspect ratio for video mode recording.
1) Follow step 1 to 2 on “Recording Audio Select(XP)”.
2) Use [K / L] to select “Aspect Ratio (Video mode)”,
then press [ENTER].
3) Use [K / L] to select your desired setting, then press
[ENTER].
General Setting
4) Use [K / L] to select “PCM” or “Dolby Digital”, then
press [ENTER].
General Setting
Auto Chapter
Audio
Select (XP)
Recording Recording
Audio Select
(XP)
Auto Finalize
PCM Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
Dolby Digital
Dubbing Mode
Make Recording Compatible
5) Press [SETUP] to exit.
Note
Note
• For DVD-RW VR mode, the image will be recorded in
whichever the ratio that the program you record are
broadcasted with, regardless of the “Aspect Ratio
(Video mode)” setting.
• For DVD+RW/+R, the image will always be recorded
in aspect ratio of 4:3.
Editing
• “PCM” stands for Pulse Code Modulation. It changes
analog sound to digital sound without compressing
audio data.
• When the recording mode is set at other than XP, the
unit records “Dolby Digital” audio automatically even
if you selected “PCM”.
4) Press [SETUP] to exit.
Playback
PCM:
Records PCM audio for the best quality sound.
Dolby Digital:
Records Dolby Digital audio for good quality sound.
Auto (default): It will be recorded with whichever the
ratio that the program you started to record are
broadcasted with.
4:3 : Recorded in the aspect ratio of 4:3.
16:9 : Recorded in the aspect ratio of 16:9.
Recording
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Disc
Management
Playback
Display
Auto Chapter
Video
Recording
Audio Select (XP)
Aspect Ratio (Video
mode)
Recording
Auto Finalize
Auto
Clock
Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
4
:
3
DivX
Dubbing Mode
16 : 9
HDMI
Make Recording Compatible
Reset All
Basic Setup
2) Use [K / L] to select “Recording”, then press
[ENTER].
“Recording” menu will appear.
Setting Aspect Ratio for Video Mode
Recording
Connections
You can enjoy high quality sound recording. This function
works only when the recording mode is set at XP.
Introduction
SETTINGS FOR A RECORDING
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 35
35
2007/12/18 17:10:06
BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING
Follow the steps to record TV programs.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
Turn on the TV and be sure to select the input to
which the unit is connected.
Press [DVD].
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to open the
disc tray and insert your disc with its
label facing up.
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1
2
Press [I/y
y ON/STANDBY].
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
Align the disc to
the disc tray guide.
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
3
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the
disc tray.
It may take awhile to load
the disc completely.
• When inserting a brand-new DVD-RW or
DVD+RW, the unit automatically starts to
format.
• If titles have been recorded on the disc, the
title list is displayed. Press [STOP C] to exit the
title list.
4
Press [REC MODE] to select a
recording mode.
Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 33 for DVD
or “Recording” on page 99 for VCR.
SE-R0295
SP
5
36
1:53
Press [INPUT SELECT ] to select the
appropriate external input position
(L1/L2) to which your external tuner
is connected. Then select the desired
channel to record on the external
tuner.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 36
2007/12/18 17:10:08
6
Press [REC I] to start recording.
“I” will be displayed for 5 seconds.
7
Press [STOP C] to stop recording.
The recorded title will be included in the title list.
(Refer to “Guide to a Title List” on page 70.)
Introduction
BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING
Connections
I
Wait for a moment
90%
Basic Setup
Press [PAUSE F] to pause recording.
Press [PAUSE F]] or [REC I] again to restart
recording.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
To set one-touch timer recording (OTR)...
I
Disc
Management
This is a simple way to set the recording time in blocks
of 30 minutes.
Press [REC I] repeatedly until the desired recording
time (30 minutes to 8 hours) appears on the TV screen.
One-touch timer recording will start.
0:30
0:30
8:00
Recording
(normal recording)
1:00
7:30
Playback
• To change the recording length during one-touch
timer recording, press [REC I] repeatedly until the
desired length appears.
• To cancel one-touch timer recording within the
specified time, press [STOP C].
Editing
• When you press [REC I], recording starts immediately and continues until the disc is full or you stop recording.
• When the unit clock has not been set, the space for a date and time of title names will be blank.
• You cannot change the recording mode during the recording pause mode.
Note for one-touch timer recording
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 37
Others
EN
VCR Function
• The remaining recording time will be displayed on the front panel display during one-touch timer recording. Press
[DISPLAY] to see it on the TV screen.
• Unlike the timer recording, you can perform the following operations during one-touch timer recording.
- Turning off the power (One-touch timer recording will be canceled.).
- Using [REC I] or [STOP C] on the remote control.
• You cannot use the pause function during one-touch timer recording.
• If DVD one-touch timer recording is completed during VCR playback or recording, the DVD will be in stop mode
and the VCR keeps the current mode.
• When one-touch timer recording is finished and the power is turned off, the unit will switch to the timer-standby
mode automatically if a timer recording has been programmed. Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the timer-standby
mode to use the unit continuously.
Function Setup
Note
37
2007/12/18 17:10:10
TIMER RECORDING
Guide to Timer Programming Display
You can program the unit to record up to 12 programs
within a month in advance. Daily or weekly program
recordings are also available.
Before recording, make sure
• Connect the external tuner to either L1 or L2 and set it
to output audio/video signals when it comes to the time
you want to start recording.
• Do not change the external tuner’s channel while you
are recording. You cannot watch one channel and
record another at the same time.
• Set the clock before setting a timer programming.
• Insert a recordable disc with enough recordable space or
a cassette tape with an erase-protection tab.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
3
1
2
Timer Programming
JAN/ 2/08 12:00 AM L1 SP
SP (1:00)
TUE JAN/01 10:00AM
Date
JAN/02
Start
End
12:00AM 1:00AM
New Program
L1/L2
L1
1/1
4
5
1. Title of a Timer Program (Contains date, time, external
input, recording mode of the program)
2. Current date and time
3. Recording mode and length of the recording
4. Timer program list
5. Total number of pages and current page (2 pages maximum)
1
2
Press [TIMER PROG.].
Use [K / L] to select “New Program”,
then press [ENTER].
Timer Programming
ENTER
TUE JAN/01 10:00AM
CLEAR
RETURN
Date
Start
End
New Program
L1/L2
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
1/1
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
• If there are 6 or more programs, use
[SKIP j / i] to change pages.
ZOOM
Note
• If you have not set the clock yet:
“Clock Setting” menu will appear instead of the timer programming list at step 1. Continue with the step 3 in
“Clock Setting” on page 26 before setting a timer programming.
• Use [s / B] to move the cursor to the left and the right in “Timer Programming” menu.
• If a basic recording or one-touch timer recording is in progress on one component (e.g., VCR) and the timer
recording set for the other component (e.g., DVD) is about to begin, the unit automatically switches to the
programmed channel for timer recording 2 minutes before the programmed starting time, and the recording in
progress (for VCR) will be canceled UNLESS their recording channels are the same. If their recording channels are
the same, the timer recording will start without canceling the recording currently in progress. In this case, the
recording of the same channel will be made on both DVD and VCR.
• You cannot make a program whose recording time exceeds 12 hours.
• Cancel the timer-standby mode by pressing [TIMER SET] before operation for either DVD or VCR. When finished
operating, press [TIMER SET] to resume the timer-standby mode.
• In the timer-standby mode, you can turn on the power and use the component (VCR or DVD) which is not
currently timer-programmed.
38
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 38
2007/12/18 17:10:11
3
Use [K / L] to enter the date, then
press [B].
Timer Programming
7
Date
JAN/02
L1/L2
L1
Start
End
New Start
Program
New Start
Program
--:-REC To
DVD
MON-FRI
e.g.) January 1st
Start
12 : 00AM
REC To
DVD
End
1 : 00AM
Mode
SP
SP
1 : 00
Disc
Management
SAT
Date
JAN/02
L1/L2
L1
Auto recording mode select...
When “Auto” is selected as a recording mode, the unit
calculates how much time is available on the disc and
determines the appropriate recording mode to
complete recording the program.
FRI
SUN
JAN/31
Use [K / L / { / B] or [the Number
buttons] to enter the start and end
time, then press [B].
New Start
Program
12 : 00AM
REC To
DVD
12 : 00AM
REC To
DVD
End
1 : 00AM
Mode
Auto
Auto
1 : 00
1/1
2 : 00
Playback
• “Auto” is only available for one program in the timer
program list.
• The recording may be cut short, when the available
recording space of the disc is too limited.
End
--:-Mode
SP
SP
New Start
Program
Recording
Date
JAN/02
L1/L2
L1
1/1
• You cannot make a program whose recording
time exceeds 12 hours.
New Start
Program
12 : 00AM
REC To
DVD
9
Press [TIMER SET] to set a timer
programming.
End
1 : 00AM
Mode
SP
SP
1 : 00
Your program setting will be stored.
• To set another program, repeat steps 2 to 7.
• To exit, press [TIMER PROG.] or [SETUP].
• When 2 or more programs are overlapped,
“Timer program overlapped” appears, and the
overlapped program will be displayed in blue.
To correct the timer program refer to
“Checking, canceling, or correcting the timer
programming information” on page 40.
1/1
Date
JAN/02
L1/L2
L1
New Start
Program
12 : 00AM
REC To
DVD
End
1 : 00AM
Mode
SP
SP
will appear on the front panel display, while this
unit waits to make the recording.
CS
1 : 00
1/1
DR
CD
HDD
DVD
“VCR” will appear on the front panel display if VCR
timer recording have been set.
VCR Function
6
Use [K / L] to select a recording media
(“DVD” or “VCR”), then press [B].
Function Setup
Date
JAN/02
L1/L2
L1
8
Press [ENTER] when all items are
entered.
Editing
5
Use [K / L] to select an appropriate
external input (L1/L2) to which your
external tuner is connected, then
press [B].
Basic Setup
Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 33 for DVD
or “Recording” on page 99 for VCR.
• You can check the remaining recordable space
of the disc when you select the recording
mode.
2 : 00
When pressing [L] at
the current date, the
date will change as
follows.
MON-SAT
1 : 00
1/1
JAN/01
Daily
End
1 : 00AM
Mode
SP
12 : 00AM
REC To
DVD
SP
1/1
Date
JAN/02
L1/L2
L1
Date
JAN/02
L1/L2
L1
L1/L2
End
--:-Mode
SP
SP
4
Use [K / L] to select a recording
mode.
Connections
TUE JAN/01 10:00AM
Date
Introduction
TIMER RECORDING
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 39
39
2007/12/18 17:10:13
TIMER RECORDING
Checking, canceling, or correcting the timer
programming information
1) Press [TIMER SET].
If the timer program did not complete correctly,
the error number appears in the timer programming list.
2) Press [TIMER PROG.].
Timer Programming
TUE JAN/01 10:00AM
3) Check the information on the list you want to edit.
E40
Date
JAN/02
Timer Programming
Start
End
12:00AM 1:00AM
New Program
L1/L2
L1
JAN/ 2/08 12:00 AM L1 SP
SP (1:00)
TUE JAN/01 10:00AM
Date
JAN/02
Start
End
12:00AM 1:00AM
New Program
L1/L2
L1
1/1
Each error number means:
1/1
4-A) To delete the timer program:
1 Use [K / L] to select the program you want to
delete, then press [ENTER].
2 Use [K / L] to select “Delete”, then press
[ENTER].
Selection menu will appear.
3 Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press [ENTER].
4-B) To correct the timer program:
1 Use [K / L] to select the program you want to
correct, then press [ENTER].
2 Use [K / L] to select “Program Change”, then
press [ENTER].
3 Correct the timer program by using
[K / L / { / B], then press [ENTER].
5) Press [TIMER PROG.] to exit.
6) Press [TIMER SET] to return to the timer standby
mode.
To stop the timer recording in progress
Press [STOP C] to stop the disc recording or
[C STOP/A EJECT] to stop the cassette tape recording
on the front panel of the unit.
[STOP C] on the remote control is not effective.
E1-22 Recording error other E40
E37-39 than below
E23-24 Unrecordable disc
E25-28 Copy prohibited program
Some portion has
not been recorded
because of program
overlapping.
Recording did not
start at the start time.
E29
Disc protected
E41
Power failed
E30
Disc full
E42
No disc when recording
E31-32 Already 99 titles
recorded
E43
Already 49 titles
recorded
E33
Already 999 chapters
recorded
E44
Already 254 chapters
recorded
E34
No space for Control
information
E45
Copy prohibited
program
E35
PCA full *1
E46
E36
Already finalized
video format disc
It is impossible to
record additionally
on a disc recorded
by other units
when setting
“Make Recording
Compatible” to “OFF”.
• A program with the error number is grayed in the timer
programming list.
• Once the timer programming list with error line(s) is
displayed, or after canceling and setting again the timer
standby mode, the program line(s) with error will be
cleared.
*1 PCA is a disc's space reserved for recording test.
Note
• Press [TIMER PROG.] to check the timer recording in
progress.
When the timer recording is proceeding, that
program will be highlighted in red. In this case, you
cannot select any other program.
40
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 40
2007/12/18 17:10:14
Hints for Timer Recording
Basic Setup
Disc
Management
[I/y ON/STANDBY] first, then select the recorded title and
press [PLAY B], or [OPEN/CLOSE A] to remove the disc.
• During timer recording or timer standby mode ( will
appear), any operations on the unit will not be available.
To make these operations available, press [C STOP] on
the front panel to cancel the timer recording or [TIMER
SET] to release timer standby mode ( will disappear).
• To cancel the timer standby mode, press [TIMER SET].
• When the starting and the ending time are the same,
“Exceeds 12 hours” appears and the program setting will
not be accepted.
• When the programmed starting and ending time are
earlier than the current time, the setting will not be
accepted.
• If the starting time is earlier and the ending time is later
than the current time, the recording will start right after
you turn the power off.
• The timer recording cannot be performed in DVD and
VCR at the same time. If you set 2 programming with the
same channel and time in both devices, the program
with a lower program number will be recorded.
Connections
• If there is a power failure or this unit has been
unplugged for more than 30 seconds, the clock setting
and all timer programming will be lost.
• If a disc is not inserted or if a inserted disc is not
recordable (finalized DVD-RW/-R, finalized DVD+RW, a
fully recorded disc, etc.), “DVD” on the front panel
display flashes and timer recording cannot be
will appear momentarily
performed. In some cases,
around the start point as the unit attempts to record.
Please insert a recordable disc.
• If a cassette tape with an erase-protection tab is not in
the cassette compartment or there is no cassette tape in
the cassette compartment, “VCR” on the front panel
display flashes and timer recording cannot be
performed. Please insert a recordable cassette tape.
• If you press [TIMER SET] and turn on the unit while
either DVD or VCR is in timer standby mode,
disappears. In this case, you cannot change the mode
between DVD and VCR. You cannot change any settings
using [SETUP] or edit discs.
• When all the timer recording is completed, flashes. To
play back or eject the recorded disc, press
Introduction
TIMER RECORDING
The Priority of Overlapped Settings
When the starting time is the same:
A program set previously (PROG. A) has priority.
Recording
This unit records the programs according to priority if the timer programmings are overlapped. The timer
programming set previously has priority.
A timer recording of lower priority will be canceled or start from the middle.
Check the overlapped timer programmings and change the priority if necessary.
When the starting time and the ending time
for each programs are different:
A program that has earlier start time has priority.
PROG. A
PROG. B
PROG. B
Playback
PROG. A
PROG. C
actual
PROG.
PROG.AA
PROG. B
recording
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.
PROG. B
Editing
When the recording time is partially overlapped:
PROG. A will start after PROG. B is complete to
be recorded.
actual
PROG. A
PROG. C
recording
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.
When the recording time is entirely overlapped:
PROG.A will not be recorded.
PROG. A
PROG. B
PROG. B
actual
PROG.B
PROG.A
recording
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.
actual
recording
Function Setup
PROG. A
PROG. B
Note for DVD recording
When the end time of the programming
currently being recorded and the start time
of the subsequent program are same:
The beginning of the PROG. B may be cut off.
VCR Function
• When the recording time of 2 programs are overlapped, or
the end time of a program and the start time of another
program is the same, the first 2 minutes (at the longest) of
the subsequent program will be cut off.
• If the cut-off portion comes up to 3 minutes or more, this
program will be displayed with errors number E40 in the
timer programming list.
PROG. A
PROG. B
PROG. A
PROG. B
Others
actual
recording
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 41
41
2007/12/18 17:10:15
SATELLITE LINK
You can set the unit to start recording whenever it
detects the video signal from the external tuner.
Preparing for the satellite link timer recording:
Preparation on the tuner
• The external tuner should be equipped with some kind
of timer function. Using timer function of the tuner, set
it to output audio/video signals when it comes to the
time you want to start recording, and stop output audio/
video signals when it comes to the time you want to
finish recording. Refer to the tuner’s manual on how to
set the timer.
• Make sure to set the satellite link standby mode when
you finish setting.
Preparation on this unit
• You must let the unit know which video input jack you
are using before making a recording.
Refer to “SETTINGS FOR THE VIDEO INPUT” on page 20.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
1
2
Press [SAT. LINK].
Use [K / L] to select the time, media
and recording mode, then press
[ENTER].
Satellite Link
Start
DVD
VCR
Mode
12:00AM
DVD
XP
To Standby Mode
3
Use [K / L] or [the Number buttons]
to set the desired starting time, then
press [B].
4
5
Use [K / L] to select a recording
media (“DVD” or “VCR”), then press
[B].
• The hour can be selected from 1 to 12 with AM
or PM.
• Repeat procedures in this step to set the
desired minutes.
• If you wish to go back to the left, press [{].
Use [K / L] to select the recording
mode.
Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 33 for DVD
or “Recording” on page 99 for VCR.
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
SE-R0295
42
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 42
2007/12/18 17:10:16
Introduction
SATELLITE LINK
Connections
6
7
Press [ENTER].
“To Standby Mode” is highlighted.
Press [ENTER] again.
Satellite Link
Start
DVD
VCR
Mode
12:00AM
DVD
XP
To Standby Mode
Basic Setup
Disc
Management
In a second, the unit will be turned off
automatically as it goes into the satellite link
standby mode.
To cancel the satellite link function while in
the satellite link standby mode:
Press [TIMER SET] to turn on the unit.
To cancel the satellite link function while the
satellite link recording is in progress:
Press [C STOP] or [A EJECT / C STOP] on the
front panel of the unit.
Recording
Playback
Editing
Note
example 3
timer
recording
timer
recording
satellite link
satellite link
satellite link
actual
recording
actual
recording
actual
recording
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 43
Others
timer
recording
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.
VCR Function
example 2
example 1
Function Setup
• If the signal of external input breaks up over 5 seconds, satellite link function will be canceled.
• If you have not set the clock, “Clock Setting” menu will appear at step 1. Follow to step 3 in “Clock Setting” on
page 26.
• You cannot set the end time for the satellite link timer recording on this unit.
• Recording picture will be distorted if the copy protection signal is being detected during satellite link timer
recording.
• You can record the satellite link by using S-video input jacks on the rear panel. Refer to page 19 for more
information.
• Press [TIMER PROG.] during the satellite link timer recording to check the satellite link timer recording in
progress.
• When a regular timer recording and the satellite link timer recording are overlapped, those recordings are
recorded as illustrated below.
43
2007/12/18 17:10:17
SETTINGS FOR AN EXTERNAL DEVICE
Connection to an External Device
Connect the external device properly to the unit by using input jacks either L2 (Front) or L1 (Rear).
When connecting an external device of monaural output to this unit, use AUDIO L jack of L2 (Front).
Use S-video or the RCA audio/video cables for this connection.
When connecting a DVC (digital video camcorder), use the DV input jack on the front panel instead of VIDEO IN jack.
or
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO OUT
L
R
DV-OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
external device
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO OUT
R
L
(camcorder, VCR etc.)
RCA
audio
cable
RCA
video
cable
DV cable
(4-pin)
S-video
cable
S-VIDEO
or
VIDEO
L
L2
R
RCA
video
cable
or
RCA
audio cable
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
IN
L
L
R
R
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
DV
L3
L1
to L2 & L3
to L1
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DVD
AUDIO
S-VIDEO COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
L
COAXIAL
S-VIDEO
IN
DVD/VCR
IN --- AUDIO --- OUT
L
L
R
R
IN ---VIDEO --- OUT
R
front of this unit
rear of this unit
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1
• RCA video cable x 1
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.
44
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 44
2007/12/18 17:10:18
Introduction
SETTINGS FOR AN EXTERNAL DEVICE
Recording from an External Device
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
7 5
Press [I REC] on the unit to start
recording.
Start playback on the external device
to record from.
Press [C STOP] / [A EJECT / C STOP]
on the unit to stop recording.
VCR Function
7 5
Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 33 for DVD
or “Recording” on page 99 for VCR.
Function Setup
2
4
5
6
7
Press [REC MODE] to select a
recording mode.
Editing
1
ZOOM
• To use the input jacks on the rear of this unit;
Select “L1” by using [INPUT SELECT ].
• To use the input jacks on the front of this unit;
Select “L2” or “DV“ (L3) by using
[INPUT SELECT ].
Playback
PAUSE
3
Select the input of the unit which the
external device is connected. (L1, L2
or DV(L3))
Recording
When you want to record to a
cassette tape:
Press [VCR].
Insert the cassette tape with an
erase-protection tab into the cassette
compartment.
AUDIO
Disc
Management
SETUP
It takes a while to load
the disc.
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
When you want to record to the disc:
Press [DVD].
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to open the disc
tray. Place the disc to record properly.
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] again to close
the disc tray.
Basic Setup
OPEN/
CLOSE
1
2
Connections
Before recording from an external device, refer to the
instructions for the connection on page 44.
Turn on the TV and press
y ON/STANDBY], and be sure to
[I/y
select the input of the TV to which
the unit is connected.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 45
45
2007/12/18 17:10:18
DV DUBBING
Guide to DV and On-Screen Display
This function helps you to easily dub the contents of the DVC (digital video camcorder) to this unit.
You can control basic operations of the DVC from the remote control of this unit such as playback, fast forward or
reverse and stop all operations if the DVC is in video mode. Use the DV cable that has 4-pin input jack and is
compliance with the IEEE1394 standards. When you connect to DV input jack on the front of this unit, select “DV”
position by using [INPUT SELECT ] on the remote control and press [DISPLAY] to show the DV dubbing
information for the operation of your DVC.
DVD mode
When the DVC is
in video mode...
1
1/ 1
1/ 1
1/ 1
-RW
2
Control
DV Audio
Start Rec
DVD
Stereo1
VR
1/ 1
ORG
DV
AB-1234
0:12:34
SP
3
When the DVC is not
in camera mode...
-RW
The menu changes according to
what mode of DVC.
Switch the mode on the DVC to
playback mode for the dubbing
information.
VR
ORG
5
DV
AB-1234
0:12:34
1:00
SP
4
7
1:00
6
VCR mode
You cannot control the DVC in VCR mode. For dubbing onto VCR, refer to page 48.
The following instructions are described with the operations using the remote control of this unit.
1. DV icon
2. Indicator of active device
• When the “Control” is
highlighted, press [ENTER] to
display the item selection. Use
[K / L] to select the device you
wish to operate, then press
[ENTER] to activate.
• Select “DVD” to control this unit.
• Select “DVC” to control your DVC.
3. Recording audio mode
• Other than the DVC is in stop
mode, the “DV Audio” can be
selected. Press [ENTER] to display
the item selection and then use
[K / L] to select the audio you
wish to output. Press [ENTER]
again to activate.
• Select “Stereo1” to dub the stereo
sound.
• Select “Stereo2” to dub the sound
with after recording sound.
• Select “Mix” to dub the stereo1
and stereo2.
4. Indicator of dubbing function
• When the unit is ready for
dubbing, “Start Rec” will appear.
• When the unit is in dubbing,
“Pause Rec” will appear.
5. Channel position
• When you select “DV” by using
[INPUT SELECT ], “DV” will
appear.
46
6. Product name of your DVC
• If the unit cannot recognize the
input signal from the DVC or the
unknown product, “No Device” or
“****” will appear instead.
7. Status of the current operation
and the time counter
Each icon means (Available icons
may vary depending on the DVC):
DVC is in stop mode.
DVC is in playback mode.
DVC is in pause mode.
DVC is fast forwarding.
(standard speed)
DVC is fast forwarding.
(faster than above)
DVC is fast forwarding.
(faster than above)
DVC is slow forwarding.
(standard speed)
DVC is slow forwarding.
(faster than above)
DVC is slow forwarding.
(faster than above)
DVC is fast forwarding.
(in stop mode)
DVC is fast reversing.
(in stop mode)
DVC is fast reversing.
(standard speed)
DVC is fast reversing.
(faster than above)
DVC is fast reversing.
(faster than above)
DVC is in slow reverse
playback.
DVC is in recording.
DVC is in recording pause
mode.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 46
2007/12/18 17:10:20
Introduction
DV DUBBING
DVC to DVD Dubbing
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
SETUP
DISPLAY
AUDIO
Press [DISPLAY].
With “Control” highlighted, press
[ENTER] to display the available
devices to control with the remote
control of this unit. Use [K / L] to
select “DVC”, then press [ENTER].
1/ 1
1/ 1
-RW
DISC MENU
Control
DV Audio
Start Rec
TOP MENU
Disc
Management
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
(Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 33 for DVD
or “Recording” on page 99 for VCR.)
Basic Setup
OPEN/
CLOSE
2
3
4
Press [REC MODE] to select a
recording mode.
DVD
Stereo1
VR
ORG
DV
AB-1234
0:12:34
RETURN
XP
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
6
7
Use [K / L] to select “Start Rec”, then
press [ENTER].
To stop dubbing;
Use [K / L] to select “Control”, then
press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “DVD”, then
press [ENTER].
Then press [STOP C].
] to select “DV”.
Function Setup
Preparing for DV to DVD dubbing:
• Insert a recordable disc and make sure your DVC is in
video mode.
The dubbing will start.
Editing
Press [DVD] first.
VCR Function
1
5
Press [PLAY B] to start playing back
the DVC, and find where you wish to
start dubbing.
Then, press [STOP C] when you come
to the desired start point.
ZOOM
SE-R0295
Use [INPUT SELECT
Now you can operate your DVC with the remote
control of this unit.
Playback
REV
1:00
Recording
ENTER
CLEAR
Connections
Before recording from DVC, see page 44 for connection
instructions.
DV
AB-1234
0:00:00
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 47
47
2007/12/18 17:10:22
DV DUBBING
DVC to VCR Dubbing
Before recording from DVC, refer to page 44 for
connection instructions.
DISC MENU
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
1
2
3
4
ZOOM
SE-R0295
Press [VCR] first.
Preparing for DV to VCR dubbing:
• Insert a recordable cassette tape and make sure your
DVC is in video mode.
5
Repeat the steps 1 and 2 on page 47.
Press the PLAY button on your DVC
to find where you wish to start
dubbing. Then, press the PAUSE
button on the DV camcorder when
you come to the desired start point.
Press [REC I] to start recording.
Press the PLAY button or the PAUSE
button on your DVC to resume the
playback.
The dubbing will start.
To pause the recording:
Press [PAUSE F] once.
“REC” will flash.
To resume recording:
Press [REC I] or press [PAUSE F] again.
“REC” will reappear.
To stop recording, press [STOP C].
Note for DV dubbing
• If you press [PAUSE F] at step 5 in “DVC to DVD Dubbing” on page 47, the tape will rewind to the point a few
seconds preceding the paused point. When you press [ENTER] at step 6 in “DVC to DVD Dubbing” on page 47,
then, it will start dubbing when it comes to the paused point.
• The unit does not send out the output signal to DVC.
• For the proper operation, connect DVC to the unit directly. Do not connect this unit and DVC via any other unit.
• Do not connect more than 1 DVC.
• The unit can only accept DVC. Other DV device such as cable/satellite box or D-VHS VCR cannot be recognized.
• If no video signal is detected from the DVC during DVC to DVD dubbing, the recording will be paused and “I” will
flash on the TV screen. The recording will resume when the unit detects the video signal again.
• When the DVC is in camera mode, refer to “Guide to DV and On-Screen Display” on page 46.
• You cannot dub from DVC during timer standby mode.
• You cannot dub from DVC to the both DVD and VCR at the same time.
• You cannot change the output mode during DVC to VCR dubbing. If you want to switch to the DVD mode, stop
the VCR first.
• During DVC to VCR dubbing, you cannot change channels while paused.
• When output is in DVD mode while playing back a DVD using DV(L3), you cannot switch to the VCR mode.
• If you are using anything other than DV(L3) to playback DVD, you can switch to the VCR mode, but cannot select
DV(L3) channel. (You can select DV(L3) after switching to the DVD mode during VCR playback.)
• During timer standby of either component, you cannot select DV(L3) even on the component which is not in timer
standby.
• Date / time and cassette memory data will not be recorded.
• Pictures with a copy-guard signal cannot be recorded.
• A DV terminal is a terminal that can use the transmission mode conforming to the IEEE 1394 standards called “Fire
Wire”. It serves as the interface that connects the PC and peripheral device such as “i.Link” (registered trademark of
SONY). It enables digital dubbing between DV devices with little degradation.
48
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 48
2007/12/19 11:13:25
Use [K / L] to select “Recording”,
then press [ENTER].
“Recording” menu will appear.
Use [K / L] to select “Dubbing
Mode”, then press [ENTER].
Selection menu will appear.
Disc
Management
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
Recording
OPEN/
CLOSE
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
“General Setting” menu will appear.
Basic Setup
Make sure:
• Insert a recordable disc and a cassette tape with an
erase-protection tab.
Note for recording to a cassette tape:
• The cassette tape's erase-protection tab is intact.
• The remaining time of the cassette tape is long enough.
Note for recording to a disc:
• Make sure that the disc is recordable. Refer to page 9.
1
2
3
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to
select “General Setting”, then press
[ENTER].
Connections
You can copy a DVD to a cassette tape or copy a cassette
tape to a DVD. This function will be possible only if the
DVD or the cassette tape is not copy protected.
Before starting this function, prepare for the recording on
the DVD-RW/-R or the cassette tape. Refer to pages 33
and 99.
Introduction
DVD/VCR DUBBING
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
Playback
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
Function Setup
PAUSE
Editing
REV
ZOOM
SE-R0295
VCR Function
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 49
Others
Instructions continue on the next page.
49
2007/12/18 17:10:25
DVD/VCR DUBBING
VCR to DVD
4
Use [K / L] to select “VCR
then press [ENTER].
DVD to VCR
DVD”,
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
5
6
Auto Chapter
Recording Audio Select (XP)
Auto Finalize
Dubbing Mode
Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
VCR Dubbing
DVD Mode
DVD Make
VCRRecording Compatible
Press [SETUP] to exit.
Press [VCR].
Press [PLAY B]. Then press
[PAUSE F] at the point you wish to
start recording.
• Since it takes about a few seconds before the
actual dubbing begins, please allow extra 5
seconds when selecting the starting point.
7
8
9
4
Press [DVD].
Make sure to select a recording speed using
[REC MODE].
Press [DUBBING].
VCR to DVD duplication will start.
Press [STOP C] to stop the recording.
5
6
7
8
9
Use [K / L] to select “DVD
then press [ENTER].
VCR”,
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Auto Chapter
Recording Audio Select (XP)
Auto Finalize
Dubbing Mode
Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
VCR Dubbing
DVD Mode
DVD Make
VCRRecording Compatible
Press [SETUP] to exit.
Press [DVD].
Press [PLAY B]. Then press
[PAUSE F] at the point you wish to
start recording.
Press [VCR].
Make sure to select a recording speed using
[REC MODE].
Press [DUBBING].
DVD to VCR duplication will start.
Press [STOP C] to stop the recording.
Title list will automatically appear.
• If you want to watch the duplicated material
after the VCR to DVD duplication, press [TOP
MENU] first then press [ENTER] twice.
Note
• You cannot change the output mode during VCR to DVD or DVD to VCR duplication.
For CD to VCR duplication:
• This function is available on Audio CD, not MP3, WMA nor DivX files.
For VCR to DVD duplication:
• After starting VCR to DVD duplication, the picture may be distorted because of the auto tracking function.
This is not a malfunction. Be advised to playback the cassette tape until the picture is stabilized, then set the
starting point where you wish to start recording, and start VCR to DVD duplication.
• The playback sound mode is followed by the setting of VCR playback sound mode on page 101. Set the playback
sound mode to which you wish to record to the DVD.
• This unit will automatically stop the duplication if playback with no image is for more than 3 minutes during VCR
to DVD duplication.
• Dubbing indicator will appear on the front panel display during dubbing.
50
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 50
2007/12/18 17:10:27
Introduction
INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK
Structure of Disc Contents
DVD video
Title 1
Title 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Title:
Chapter:
Audio CD
Track 1
Track 2
file 1
Track 4
Track 5
Each title, chapter, or track, folder or file is assigned a
number, which is called “title number”, “chapter number”,
“track number”, “folder number” or “file number”
respectively.
Some discs may not have these numbers.
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®
folder 2
file 2
file 3
file 4
file 5
Disc
Management
folder 1
Track 3
Basic Setup
Track:
Folder:
Divided contents of a DVD video. Roughly
corresponds to a story title in short stories.
Divided contents of a title. This corresponds to
a chapter in a story.
Divided contents of an audio CD.
Divided contents of a MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®
data disc. Consists of number of files.
Connections
The contents of DVD are generally divided into titles, and the titles are subdivided into chapters.
Audio CDs are divided into tracks.
Data disc contains MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® are divided into folders, and the folders are subdivided into files.
Recording
Playback
Editing
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 51
51
2007/12/18 17:10:28
BASIC PLAYBACK
Direct Playback
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
Turn on the TV and be sure to select the input to
which the unit is connected.
Press [DVD].
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to open the
disc tray and insert your disc with its
label facing up.
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1
2
Press [I/y
y ON/STANDBY].
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
Align the disc to
the disc tray guide.
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
3
4
5
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the
disc tray.
It may take awhile to load
the disc completely.
Press [PLAY B] to start playback.
If you are playing back a DVD-video, a menu
may appear.
Refer to “Using the Title/Disc Menu” on page 57.
Press [STOP C] once to stop playback
temporarily.
• Refer to “Resume Playback” on page 58.
SE-R0295
Note
• Some discs may start playback automatically.
52
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 52
2007/12/18 17:10:28
Introduction
BASIC PLAYBACK
Playback from the Title List
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
5
Use [K / L / { / B] to select a desired
title, then press [ENTER].
Press [TOP MENU].
Title list will appear.
Press [DISC MENU] to switch Original/Playlist if
necessary.
• To exit the title list, press [STOP C].
• To resume the title list, press [TOP MENU].
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW original
ORG
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 SP
12:00AM (0:12:00) JAN/ 1/08
ZOOM
Playback
PAUSE
It may take awhile to load
the disc completely.
SE-R0295
L1 SP
1
2
3
4
5
6
Editing
1/6
Turn on the TV and be sure to select the input to
which the unit is connected.
6
Use [K / L] to select “Play From
Start”, then press [ENTER].
ORG
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 SP
12:00AM (0:12:00) JAN/ 1/08
1
Press [DVD].
4
2
Play From Start
Edit
Title Delete
5
Add To Playlist
L1 SP
3
6
1/6
Playback will start.
• Refer to “Resume Playback” on page 58.
To eject the disc, press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to
open the disc tray, then remove the disc before
turning off the unit.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 53
Others
7
Press [STOP C] once to stop playback
temporarily.
VCR Function
Note
• You can also start playback by pressing [PLAY B]
instead of [ENTER].
• At step 4, you can press [SKIP G], or press [B]
when the title on the lower right of the title list is
highlighted to display the next page, and press
[SKIP H], or press [{] when the title on the upper
left of the title list is highlighted to display the
previous page.
Function Setup
1
Press [I/y
y ON/STANDBY].
Recording
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
3
4
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the
disc tray.
Disc
Management
DISC MENU
AUDIO
Align the disc to
the disc tray guide.
Basic Setup
INPUT
SELECT
Connections
2
OPEN/
CLOSE
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to open the
disc tray and insert your disc with its
label facing up.
53
2007/12/18 17:10:30
BASIC PLAYBACK
Playing Back an Audio CD and a CD-RW/-R with MP3/WMA/JPEG Files
When selecting track/file:
Playback will start.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
1
2
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
Follow steps 1 to 2 in “Direct
Playback” on page 52.
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the
disc tray.
It may take awhile to load
the disc completely.
File list will appear automatically.
• To exit the file list, press [STOP C].
• To resume the file list, press [TOP MENU].
3
Use [K / L] to select a desired folder
or track/file, then press [ENTER].
File List
DISC NAME
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
JPEG file1
JPEG file2
MP3 file1
MP3 file2
WMA file1
WMA file2
1/ 2
54
When selecting folder:
The files in the folder will appear.
Use [K / L] to select the file or folder you want to play
back, then press [ENTER].
• Press [PLAY B], [ENTER] or [B] to move to any lower
hierarchies.
• Press [s] or [RETURN] to move back to the previous
hierarchy.
Hints for audio CD tracks and MP3 / WMA / JPEG files:
.
• Folders are shown by
.
• Audio CD tracks are shown by
• MP3 files are shown by 3 .
• WMA files are shown by W .
.
• JPEG files are shown by
• The system can recognize up to 255 folders and, up to
99 tracks/999 files.
• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space
will be displayed as “…”.
• If there are no files in the folder, “No Files” will be displayed.
It is recommended that files to be played back in this
unit are recorded under the following specifications:
<MP3 / WMA>
• Sampling frequency
: 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
• Constant bit rate
: 112 kbps - 320 kbps (MP3),
48 kbps - 192 kbps
(WMA).
<JPEG>
• Upper limit
: 6,300 x 5,100 dots.
• Lower limit
: 32 x 32 dots.
• File size of image maximum : 12 MB.
Note
• The audio source of MP3 files cannot be recorded as
digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.
• Files whose extension is other than “.mp3(MP3)”
“.wma(WMA)” or “.jpg / .jpeg(JPEG)” will not be listed.
• Some unplayable folders or files may be listed due to
the recording status.
• High-resolution JPEG files take longer to be displayed.
• Progressive JPEG files (JPEG files saved in progressive
format) cannot be played back on this unit.
• The JPEG pictures can also rotate by using [s / B].
This DVD Video Recorder requires discs/recordings to
meet certain technical standards in order to achieve
optimal playback quality. There are many different types
of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing
MP3/WMA files). Not all recordable discs will operate or
produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria
set forth in this owner's manual are meant only as a
guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.
You must obtain any required permission from
copyright owners to download or use copyrighted
content. Toshiba cannot and does not grant such
permission.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 54
2007/12/18 17:10:32
Introduction
BASIC PLAYBACK
Playing Back a DivX®
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
DISPLAY
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
ZOOM
File List
DISC NAME
Folder1
Folder2
1 DivX File1
2 DivX File2
When selecting file:
Playback will start.
When selecting folder:
The files in the folder will appear.
Use [K / L] to select the file you want to play back, then
press [ENTER].
• Press [PLAY B], [ENTER] or [B] to move to any lower
hierarchy.
• Press [s] or [RETURN] to move back to the previous
hierarchy.
Editing
SE-R0295
DivX® subtitle
Function Setup
The subtitle created by the user can be displayed
during DivX® playback.
1) After selecting the DivX® file, the “Subtitle List”
menu will appear when “DivX Subtitle” is set to
anything other than “OFF”. (Refer to page 95.)
2) Use [K / L] to select the extension you want to
display, then press [ENTER].
Subtitle List
DivX File1
VCR Function
OFF
SMI
SRT
SUB
ASS
SSA
TXT
EN
Others
DivX® with the subtitle starts playback. The subtitle
cannot be displayed when the setting is “OFF”.
• If there is more than one extension, the extension
selection appears in the subtitle list.
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 55
Playback
PAUSE
3
Use [K / L] to select the desired
folder or file, then press [ENTER].
Recording
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
It may take awhile to load
the disc completely.
Disc
Management
DISC MENU
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the
disc tray.
File list will appear automatically.
• To exit the file list, press [STOP C].
• To resume the file list, press [TOP MENU].
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1
2
Basic Setup
INPUT
SELECT
Connections
OPEN/
CLOSE
Follow steps 1 to 2 in “Direct
Playback” on page 52.
55
2007/12/18 17:10:35
BASIC PLAYBACK
It is recommended that files to be played back in this
unit are recorded under the following specifications:
Official DivX® Certified product
• Playable codec of AVI files : DivX®3.x, DivX®4.x,
DivX®5.x, DivX®6.0
• Maximum size of image
: 720 x 480 @30 fps
720 x 576 @25 fps
• Sampling frequency of audio : 8 kHz - 48 kHz
• Audio type
: MPEG1 audio layer 3(MP3),
MPEG1 audio layer 2,
Dolby Digital
Hint for the purchased or rental official DivX®
Certified product
• When you purchased or rental a DivX® file through the
official site of DivX® video which is called DivX® VideoOn-Demand (VOD) services, a registration code is
required every time you get the new file from the DivX®
VOD services. Refer to “DivX® VOD” on page 95.
• Some DivX® VOD files are
restricted with the limited
DivX VOD Rental
playable times (you cannot
This rental has
views left.
play them back beyond the
Do you want to use one
of your views now?
limit). If your DivX® VOD file
No
Yes
has such limit, the playback
confirmation screen will
appear.
Use [s / B] to select “Yes” if you want to play back the
file, or to select “No” if you do not wish to play it back.
Then, press [ENTER] to
confirm the selection.
• You cannot play back the
Rental Expired
This rental is expired.
DivX® VOD files, of which
Please push ‘TOP MENU’.
rental period has been
expired. In such case, press
[TOP MENU] and select other
files that can be played back.
R
Note for DivX®
• DivX® is a codec (compression/decompression) that
can compress images to a very small amount of data.
The software can compress video data from almost
any devices to the size that can be sent on the Internet
without compromising visual quality of the images.
• A file with an extension of “.avi” and “.divx” is called an
DivX® file. All files with the “.avi” extension are
recognized as MPEG4.
• Files whose extension other than “.avi” and “.divx” will
not be listed on the DivX® menu. However, unplayable
folders and files may be displayed, depending on the
recording conditions.
• Even if the file has an extension of either “.avi” and
“.divx”, this unit cannot play it back if it is recorded in
the format other than DivX®.
is shown on the top of the file name.
• A symbol of
• A maximum of 255 folders or 999 files may be
recognized in a disc.
• Up to 8 hierarchies can be recognized in a folder. Files
in the 9th or deeper hierarchies cannot be played back.
• If there are more than 9 files, a down arrow “ ”
appears, indicating that the user can view another part
on the previous page. The current page number and
the number of total pages are shown on the bottom of
the screen.
• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given
space will be displayed as “…”.
• You can play back the disc recorded in multi-session.
• It may take awhile for audio and images to be output
after you inserted a disc and pressed [PLAY B].
• When playing back the files recorded in high bit rates,
the images can be interrupted in some occasions.
• Although DivX® logo has been obtained for this unit, it
may not be able to play back some data, depending
on the characteristics, bit rates, or audio format
settings, etc.
• A DivX® file whose file size exceeds 2 GB cannot be
played back.
• If a large-sized DivX® file is selected, it may take awhile
to start the playback (over 20 seconds sometimes).
• If you try to playback the DivX® file that has the screen
resolution which this unit does not support, the
playback will be stopped and error message will appear.
56
• If DivX® files written on a CD-RW/-R cannot be played
back, rewrite them on a DVD-RW/-R or DVD+RW/+R
and try to play back.
• For more information for
DivX®, please visit
Please select the media
http://www.divx.com.
to play back.
• If you insert a CD-RW/-R with
Video
DivX® files that are mixed
Audio & Picture
with MP3/WMA/JPEG files,
the playback media selection
screen will be displayed.
Please select “Video” and proceed to next step.
• Press [DISC MENU] to call up the playback media
selection screen in stop mode.
• If you select “Audio & Picture” instead of “Video” on
the playback media selection screen, this unit can play
back MP3/WMA/JPEG files.
• Some DivX® files cannot be played back on this unit due to the
configuration and characteristics
of the disc, or due to the
condition of recording and
Authorization Error
authoring software.
This player is not authorized to
play this video.
• You cannot play back the
Please push 'TOP MENU'.
DivX® VOD files obtained
with different registration
codes on this unit. Press
[TOP MENU] and select other files that can be played
back.
Note for DivX® subtitle
• To utilize this function, the following conditions must
meet.
– “DivX Subtitle” must be activated in “DivX” menu.
(Refer to “DivX Subtitle” on page 95.)
– Playback file and the subtitle file must have the same
name.
– Playback file and the subtitle file must locate in the
same folder.
– Only the subtitle files with the following extensions
are supported; .smi (.SMI), .srt (.SRT), .sub (.SUB) .ass
(.ASS), .ssa (.SSA), .txt (.TXT).
(.sub (.SUB) and .txt (.TXT) files may not be recognized.)
– The subtitles that exceeds the playback time of the
DivX® file will not be displayed.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 56
2007/12/18 17:10:36
Using the Title/Disc Menu
Pause
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [PAUSE F].
Playback will be paused and sound will be muted.
Connections
DVD may contain a title list, which describes the contents
of the disc, or a disc menu, which guides you through the
available functions in the disc.
Press [DVD] first.
1) Press [TOP MENU] or [DISC MENU] to call up the
title list or disc menu.
Introduction
BASIC PLAYBACK
Basic Setup
2) Use [K / L / { / B] to make a selection, and then
press [ENTER] to enable your selection.
F
3) Press [STOP C] to exit the disc menu.
Note
Note
Disc
Management
• You can select a numbered menu with [the Number
buttons] also.
• Menus vary among discs. Refer to the information
accompanying the disc for details.
• [DISC MENU] or [TOP MENU] will not always be
effective for all DVDs.
2) Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.
• For DVD / DivX® files, set “Still Mode” to “Field” in
“Playback” menu if pictures in the pause mode are
blurred. (Refer to page 90.)
Recording
Playback
Editing
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 57
57
2007/12/18 17:10:37
SPECIAL PLAYBACK
Resume Playback
You can play back from where you stopped playing back
the disc last.
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [STOP C].
The resume message will appear.
Resume ON
2) Press [PLAY B].
In a few seconds, playback will resume from the point
at which it stopped last. You can resume playback at
the same point even if you turn off the unit.
To cancel the resume playback and start playing back
the disc from the beginning, press [STOP C] again
while the playback is stopped.
Skipping TV Commercials During
Playback
You can skip TV commercials to enjoy the recorded
programs without interrupting.
Press [DVD] first.
During playback, press [INSTANT SKIP].
Normal playback will start at 30 seconds ahead from
where you press [INSTANT SKIP].
Every time you press [INSTANT SKIP], the searching
point will be extended by 30 seconds ahead.
You can press [INSTANT SKIP] up to 6 times (180 seconds).
e.g.) Press [INSTANT SKIP] once.
Note
• For MP3/WMA/JPEG files, playback will resume from
the beginning of the file at which playback was
stopped.
Instant Skip 30sec.
Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Playback
(forwarding 30 seconds)
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [FWD D] or [REV E].
Every time you press [FWD D] or [REV E],
approximate speed will be changed as follows.
Fast forward or fast reverse playback across titles (for
DVD), or files (for MP3 / WMA / DivX® files) is not
possible.
FWD
40x
REV
FWD
20x
REV
FWD
5x
REV
FWD
normal
speed
playback
REV
FWD
2x
REV
20x
REV
B
Playback will return to the normal playback.
FWD
40x
For audio CD, MP3/WMA files, approximate speed is
fixed at 8x with sound.
Picture quality of DivX® files in fast reverse is lower
than that in fast forward.
For some DivX® files, fast forward/fast reverse may not
function.
2) Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.
Note
• Forward/reverse speed will be indicated with icons
as follows.
forward (approx. speed)
2x:
20x:
40x:
reverse (approx. speed)
5x:
20x:
40x:
58
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 58
2007/12/18 17:10:38
Rapid Playback
Press [1.3X / 0.8X PLAY] twice during playback.
Plays back approximately at 1.3 times of normal
playback.
B:
Press [1.3X / 0.8X PLAY] thrice to play back in
normal speed.
No effects.
2) Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.
Note
FWD
1/8x
REV
FWD
1/16x
REV
FWD
pause
REV
FWD
1/16x
REV
FWD
1/8x
REV
1/3x
2) Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.
Note
• Forward/reverse speed will be indicated with icons
as follows.
forward (approx. speed)
1/16x:
1/8x:
1/3x:
reverse (approx. speed)
1/16x:
1/8x:
1/4x:
• For some DivX® files, slow forward/slow reverse may
not function.
• Only slow forward is available when playing back
DivX® files.
Playback
Step by Step Playback
1/4x
REV
Recording
• Audio (language) setting cannot be changed while
using this mode.
• This feature may not work at some point in a disc.
• Audio is LPCM (2 channel) during rapid playback.
FWD
Disc
Management
B x1.3 :
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [PAUSE F]. Then press
[FWD D] or [REV E].
Every time you press [FWD D] or [REV E],
approximate speed will be changed as follows. (The
sound will remain muted.)
Basic Setup
B x0.8 : Press [1.3X / 0.8X PLAY] once during playback.
Plays back approximately at 0.8 times of normal
playback.
Slow Forward / Slow Reverse Playback
Connections
Rapid playback function is available only during
playback.
This function is available only on discs recorded in the
Dolby Digital format, and plays back in a slightly faster/
slower speed while keeping the sound output.
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [1.3X / 0.8X PLAY].
Introduction
SPECIAL PLAYBACK
Editing
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [PAUSE F].
Playback will be paused and sound will be muted.
2) Press [SKIP i ] repeatedly.
Playback will advance one frame at a time when you
press [SKIP i ] with the sound muted.
To play back step by step backward:
Press [SKIP j ] repeatedly.
Every time you press the button, the playback will go
backward by one frame.
• Press and hold [SKIP j ] / [SKIP i ] to reverse/
advance continuously.
3) Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.
Function Setup
VCR Function
Note
• Only step by step forward playback is available for
playing back DivX® files.
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 59
59
2007/12/18 17:10:41
SPECIAL PLAYBACK
Marker Setting
Zoom
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY] or [ZOOM].
• If you press [ZOOM], skip to step3.
, then press [ENTER] within
2) Use [{ / B] to select
1 second, or wait for 1 second to display the
selection menu.
e.g.) DVD-video
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
This feature allows you to assign a specific point on a disc
to be called back later.
Press [DVD] first.
• For audio CD, skip to step 2.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
2) Use [{ / B] to select
, then press [ENTER] within
1 second, or wait for 1 second to display the marker
list.
e.g.) DVD-video
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
3) Use [K / L] to select a desired zoom factor to zoom,
then press [ENTER].
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
3) Use [K / L] to select a desired marker number.
When it reaches the desired point, press [ENTER].
× 1.2
× 1.5
× 2.0
1/ 5
1/ 5
DVD Video
1
2
3
Zoom menu will appear.
There are four options
(x1.0, x1.2, x1.5 and x2.0), these are displayed
excluding the current zoom rate.
Zoom area will be displayed.
4) Use [K / L / { / B] to select a desired zoom
position, then press [ENTER].
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
4
5
6
-------------
The title (track) number and the time will be displayed.
4) To return to the marker:
Use [K / L] to select the desired marker number,
then press [ENTER].
Note
Zoom playback will start.
Note
• To clear a marker, select the marker number to be
cleared, then press [CLEAR].
• All markers will be erased when you operate these
operations listed below.
– Opening the disc tray
– Turning off the power
– Recording on a recordable disc
• You can mark up to 6 points.
• When selecting a smaller factor than the current one,
the zoom area will not be displayed.
• To exit the zoom menu, press [DISPLAY] repeatedly.
• To cancel the zoom function, select “x1.0” using
[K / L], then press [ENTER] at step 3.
• You cannot slide the zoomed picture on some JPEG
files.
60
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 60
2007/12/18 17:10:44
Introduction
SPECIAL PLAYBACK
Chasing Playback during Recording
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
-RW
VR
ORG
5
1:23:45
-RW
VR
ORG
L1
Resume ON
LP
1:01
To stop recording, press [STOP C] again.
To cancel the resume, press [STOP C] again.
Editing
• Playback image may freeze momentarily using this
function.
However, this does not affect the recording.
• The 2x fast forward playback is not available.
• [REC I] is not available during this function.
• You must cancel this function first by pressing
[STOP C] once. Then you can use [REC I] to use
OTR (one-touch timer recording) function or change
recording time for the OTR.
• “Wait for a moment.” will be displayed on the screen
if you press [PLAY B] before 1 minute of recording.
• This function is available only when you are
recording on a DVD-RW in VR mode, with the
recording mode LP, EP or SLP.
Playback
5
Note
Recording
2) Press [STOP C] once to stop playback.
The resume message will appear.
Screen for the current recording:
To cancel the resume, press [STOP C] again.
Disc
Management
If you play back the fast forward playback and the
playback reaches the scene recorded 1 minute before,
the forwarding playback will automatically return to
the normal playback.
With [TIME SLIP], even if you leave your couch while
you are watching TV through this unit, you can come
back and watch rest of the program from right where
you left at any convenient time with just one button.
Please make sure to put VR mode DVD-RW disc, and set
the recording mode to LP, EP or SLP.
1) While viewing a TV broadcast via this unit, press
[TIME SLIP].
This unit start to record the TV broadcast.
2) Press [TIME SLIP] again.
Playback will start from the point at which you press
[TIME SLIP] first while recording continues.
• While viewing the recorded content, you can pause
and resume the playback by pressing [TIME SLIP].
3) Press [STOP C] once to stop playback.
To stop recording, press [STOP C] again.
Basic Setup
1) During recording, press [PLAY B].
Playback will start from the beginning of the program
that you are currently recording.
Screen for the current playback:
Using [TIME SLIP] ...
Connections
You can play back the already recorded part of the
currently recording program without waiting for the
recording to the end. This function works from 1
minute after the start of the recording.
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 61
61
2007/12/18 17:10:47
SPECIAL PLAYBACK
Simultaneous Playback and Recording
You can also play back a recorded title during current
recording or the timer recording on the same disc.
3) Press [STOP C] once to stop playback.
The resume message will appear.
Screen for the current recording:
1) During recording, press [DISPLAY].
Screen for the current recording:
3
1
1:30:25
-RW
VR
ORG
L1
3
1
1:23:45
-RW
VR
ORG
L1
Resume ON
2) Select
icon using [{ / B], then press [ENTER].
will be highlighted.
The title number next to
Title:
Enter a desired title number to search using
[K / L] or [the Number buttons], then press
[ENTER].
Selected title playback will start.
Chapter:
for chapter, press [B].
To move to
Enter a desired chapter number to search using
[K / L] or [the Number buttons], then press
[ENTER].
Selected chapter playback will start.
If you play back the currently recording program and the
playback reaches the scene recorded 1 minute before,
the forwarding playback will automatically return to the
normal playback.
62
LP
1:01
To stop recording, press [STOP C] again.
To cancel the resume, press [STOP C] again.
Note
• Playback image may freeze momentarily using this
function.
However, this does not affect the recording.
• The 2x fast forward playback is not available.
• This function is available only when you are
recording on a DVD-RW in VR mode, with the
recording mode LP, EP or SLP.
• Only the titles (chapters) in the original can be
selected.
You cannot select titles from the title list.
• When you stop the playback after the timer
recording is completed, the unit will be switched to
the timer standby mode if another program has been
set (refer to “Hints for Timer Recording” on page 41).
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 62
2007/12/18 17:10:47
Title/Chapter Search
Introduction
SEARCH
Track Search
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [SKIP i] to skip the
current track/file and move to the next.
The track/file will move forward one at a time.
To go back to the beginning of the current track/file,
press [SKIP j ].
Press it twice in quick successions to go to the previous
track/file. The track/file will move backward one at a
time.
To go back to the beginning of the current title or
chapter, press [SKIP j ].
Press it twice in quick successions to go to the previous
title or chapter. The title or chapter will move
backward one title at a time.
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
2) Use [{ / B] to select
e.g.) DVD-video
, then press [ENTER].
Press [DVD] first.
• For audio CD, MP3 or WMA, skip to step 2.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
2) Use [{ / B] to select
e.g.) audio CD
1/ 5
Disc
Management
Using [DISPLAY]
Using [DISPLAY]
Basic Setup
Using [SKIP j ] / [SKIP i ]
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [SKIP i ] to skip the
current title or chapter and move to the next.
The title or chapter will move forward by one at a time.
• If there is no chapter in one title, the current title will
be skipped.
Connections
Using [SKIP j ] / [SKIP i ]
, then press [ENTER].
0:00:15 / 0:05:00
CD
1/ 5
Recording
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
e.g.) MP3 files
1/ 5
The number next to
will be highlighted.
The number next to
will be highlighted.
3) Use [K / L] or [the Number buttons] to enter a
desired track/file number to search, then press
[ENTER].
After the search, playback will start automatically.
Note
• During CD playback, you can enter a track number
directly using [the Number buttons] for track search
without displaying the menu.
Function Setup
• In search mode display, total numbers of each search
contents (title/chapter/time) are shown as a
denominator.
1/ 5
1/ 5
Editing
Note
MP3
Playback
3) Title:
Use [K / L] or [the Number buttons] to enter a
desired title number to search, then press [ENTER].
Title search will start.
Chapter:
for
Press [B] to move to the number next to
chapter.
Use [K / L] or [the Number buttons] to enter a
desired chapter number to search, then press
[ENTER].
After the search, playback will start automatically.
0:00:15
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
VCR Function
total number
total time
of titles
of the title
total number
of chapters
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 63
63
2007/12/18 17:10:48
SEARCH
Time Search
Press [DVD] first.
• For audio CD, skip to step 2.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
, then press [ENTER].
2) Use [{ / B] to select
e.g.) DVD-video
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
e.g.) audio CD
1/ 5
0:00:15 / 0:05:00
CD
The number next to
will be highlighted.
To move to the number next to
, press [B].
When time search is not available,
counter are not displayed.
and time
3) Use [K / L / { / B] or [the Number buttons] to
enter a desired time to search, then press [ENTER].
After the search, playback will start automatically.
Note
• Time search is available only in the same track, file or
title.
64
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 64
2007/12/18 17:10:50
Repeat Playback
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
Basic Setup
, then press [ENTER] within
2) Use [{ / B] to select
1 second, or wait for 1 second to display the
selection menu.
Connections
Available repeat function may vary depending the discs.
Press [DVD] first.
• For audio CD, MP3, or WMA, skip to step 2, or press
[REPEAT] and skip to step 3.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY] or [REPEAT].
• If you press [REPEAT], skip to step3.
Title:
The current title will be played back repeatedly.
Chapter:
The current chapter will be played back repeatedly.
All:
The current disc will be played back repeatedly.
A-B:
Desired section can be played back repeatedly.
1) Use [K / L] to select “A-B”, then press [ENTER].
2) Press [ENTER] at the desired starting point A.
3) Press [ENTER] at the desired ending point B.
Track:
The current track or file will be played back repeatedly.
Group:
The current folder will be played back repeatedly.
Introduction
REPEAT/RANDOM/PROGRAM PLAYBACK/SLIDE SHOW
Note
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
OFF
Title
Chapter
A-B
1/ 5
0:00:15 / 0:05:00
CD
OFF
Track
All
A-B
1/ 5
0:00:15
MP3
Random Playback
OFF
Track
All
Group
0:00:15 / 0:05:00
DivX
OFF
Track
All
Group
A-B
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
Repeat
Title
2) Use [K / L] to select “CD Playback Mode”, then press
[ENTER].
“CD Playback Mode” menu will appear.
3) Use [K / L] to select “Random Play”, then press
[ENTER].
Random playback will start.
e.g.) audio CD
1/ 5
Function Setup
The selected repeat playback will start.
Editing
You can play back a disc randomly instead of playing
back in the original order.
Press [DVD] first.
1) Press [SETUP] in stop mode.
e.g.) DivX® files
1/ 5
Playback
e.g.) MP3/WMA/JPEG files
Recording
e.g.) audio CD
• Point B for the repeat A-B playback should be set
within the same title or track of point A.
• To cancel the repeat playback, select “OFF” at step 3.
The repeat setting will also be canceled when you
stop playback.
• You cannot select “Group” during the random
playback of MP3/WMA/JPEG files.
• For some DivX® files, A-B repeat playback may not
function.
• Chapter/Track repeat will be canceled whenever a
Chapter/Track is skipped forward or backward.
• During the A-B repeat, if you reaches the point A
with any reverse playback, the reverse playback will
be canceled and the A-B repeat playback resumes
from point A.
Disc
Management
3) Use [K / L] to select a desired option to repeat,
then press [ENTER].
e.g.) DVD-video
0:00:15 / 0:05:00
VCR Function
CD
Random
Note
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 65
Others
• To cancel random playback, press [STOP C] twice
during random playback. “OFF” appears on the
display menu.
65
2007/12/27 14:36:37
REPEAT/RANDOM/PROGRAM PLAYBACK/SLIDE SHOW
Program Playback
Slide Show
You can program the disc to play back in your desired
order.
Press [DVD] first.
1) Press [SETUP] in stop mode.
You can select the display time between 5 seconds and
10 seconds.
Press [DVD] first.
1) Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Program Playback” on the
left.
2) Use [K / L] to select “CD Playback Mode”, then press
[ENTER].
“CD Playback Mode” menu will appear.
2) Use [K / L] to select “Slide Show”, then press
[ENTER].
3) Use [K / L] to select “Program Play”, then press
[ENTER].
3) Use [K / L] to select the display time, then press
[ENTER].
4) Use [K / L] to select a desired track, then press
[ENTER] or [B].
4) Press [SETUP] to exit.
Note
CD Playback Mode
• Large-size JPEG files take a few moments to be
displayed.
Program Play
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Total
0:00:00
Repeat this step until you program all the desired
tracks.
5) Press [PLAY B].
CD Playback Mode
Program Play
09
04
10
06
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Total
0:31:07
Program playback will start.
Note
• To erase tracks you selected, press [CLEAR] at step 4.
• You can make program settings up to 50 tracks.
• To cancel program playback, press [STOP C] twice
during program playback. “OFF” appears on the TV
screen.
• You may also select a desired track using [the
Number buttons] at step 4.
66
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 66
2007/12/18 17:10:53
You can select the format of audio and video as you prefer depending on the contents of the disc you are playing back.
Switching Subtitles
Switching Audio Soundtrack
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
2) Use [{ / B] to select
, then press [ENTER] within
1 second, or wait for 1 second to display the
selection menu.
Basic Setup
2) Use [{ / B] to select
, then press [ENTER] within
1 second, or wait for 1 second to display the
selection menu.
e.g.) DVD-video
When playing back a DVD-video recorded with 2 or more
soundtracks (these are often in different languages), you
can switch them during playback.
When playing back audio CD, you can switch “L/R”(stereo),
“L”(left) or “R”(right).
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY] or [AUDIO ].
• If you press [AUDIO ], skip to step3.
Connections
DVD-video may have subtitles in one or more languages.
Available subtitle languages can be found on the disc
case. You can switch subtitle languages during playback.
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
Introduction
SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO
DVD Video
1/ 5
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
1.Dolby Digital 2ch English
2.Dolby Digital 5.1ch English
Subtitle will be displayed in the selected language.
When “OFF” is selected, subtitle will disappear.
1/ 5
0:00:15 / 0:05:00
CD
1. L/R
2. L
3. R
Editing
• Some discs will only allow you to change the subtitle
from the disc menu. Press [DISC MENU] or [TOP
MENU] to display the disc menu.
• If a 4-digit language code appears in the subtitle
menu, refer to the “LANGUAGE CODE” on page 106.
• For disc with DivX® files, the TV screen only displays
the number of subtitle languages and “- - - -“ next to
the numbers.
Playback
Note
• If the title contains both main and sub audio, you can
further select “L“ (main), “R“ (sub), “L/R“ (mixed of
main and sub).
For audio CD
• Audio channel will switch.
e.g.) audio CD
Recording
DVD Video
DVD Video
OFF
1.English
Disc
Management
3) Use [K / L] to select a desired subtitle language,
then press [ENTER].
3) Use [K / L] to select a desired audio soundtrack or
audio channel, then press [ENTER].
For DVD-video, VR mode DVD-RW, or DivX® files
• Audio soundtrack will switch.
e.g.) DVD-video
Note
Function Setup
• Some discs will only allow you to change the
soundtrack from the disc menu. Press [DISC MENU]
or [TOP MENU] to display the disc menu.
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 67
67
2007/12/18 17:10:54
SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO
Switching Virtual Surround System
You can enjoy stereophonic virtual space through your
existing 2 channel stereo system.
Press [DVD] first.
• For audio CD, MP3 or WMA, skip to step 2.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
Switching Camera Angles
Some DVD-video have scenes shot from two or more
angles. Angle information should be on the disc case if
the disc contains multi-angle scenes.
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
, then press [ENTER].
2) Use [{ / B] to select
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
2) Use [{ / B] to select
, then press [ENTER] within
1 second, or wait for 1 second to display the
selection menu.
e.g.) DVD-video
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
Angle icon appears when a switching camera angle is available.
Angle will switch each time you press [ENTER].
3) Use [K / L] to select “OFF”, “Type 1” or “Type 2”,
then press [ENTER].
e.g.) DVD-video
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
Note
• Angle icon does not appear on the TV screen if you
set “Angle Icon” to “OFF” in “Playback” menu.
Refer to page 90.
DVD Video
OFF
Type 1
Type 2
OFF
: no effect
Type 1 : natural effect
Type 2 : emphasized effect
Note
• Select “OFF” if sound is distorted.
• The setting will be kept when the unit is turned off.
Reducing Block Noise
Press [DVD] first.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
, then press [ENTER] within
2) Use [{ / B] to select
1 second, or wait for 1 second to display the
selection menu.
e.g.) DVD-video
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
3) Use [K / L] to, select “Noise Reduction”, then press [ENTER].
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
Noise Reduction OFF
Black Level
OFF
4) Use [K / L] to select a desired option, then press [ENTER].
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
OFF
Type 1
Type 2
68
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 68
Your setting will be activated.
This function reduces noise in the playback picture. If
noises appear on the TV screen during playing back
discs recorded in long time recording mode such as EP
or SLP, select “Type 1” or “Type 2”.
(“Type 2” is more effective.)
When playing back discs with a few noises such as
DVD-video, select “OFF”.
2007/12/18 17:10:55
Introduction
SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO
Adjusting Black Level
Connections
You can adjust the black level to control the brightness
of the picture in order to get a better picture.
1) During playback, press [DISPLAY].
1/ 5
1/ 5
Basic Setup
2) Use [{ / B] to select
. Press [ENTER] within 1
second, or wait for 1 second to display the selection
menu.
e.g.) DVD-video
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
Disc
Management
3) Use [K / L] to select “Black Level”, then press
[ENTER].
1/ 5
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
DVD Video
Recording
Noise Reduction OFF
Black Level
OFF
4) Use [K / L] to select “ON”, then press [ENTER].
Your setting will be activated.
1/ 5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45
Playback
1/ 5
DVD Video
OFF
ON
Note
Editing
• You can adjust black level setting only during
playback.
• The setting will be kept even when the unit is turned
off.
• The default setting is “ON”.
• You cannot adjust the black level for the images
output through the HDMI.
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 69
69
2007/12/18 17:10:58
INFORMATION ON DISC EDITING
Guide to a Title List
Editing Discs
Title list allows you to check the titles recorded on the
disc easily. You can choose a title to play back from this
list and easily edit the titles as you prefer.
Press [TOP MENU].
4
ORG
5
6
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
L1 LP
1
2
3
4
5
6
1/2
3
2 1
ORG
3
Edit
2
Scene Delete
Edit Title Name
Chapter Mark
Protect
JAN/31/08 11:00PM L1 LP
0 : 00 : 59
11 10
9
8
7
1. Title list: List of the titles recorded on the disc, and
their information.
• For DVD+RW/+R, empty title always appears at the
last of the title list.
• For the titles being blocked by the v-chip system,
“BLOCK” will be displayed and you cannot watch the
contents.
2. The protect icon: Appears when the title has been
protected. (Original titles only)
3. Arrow: Indicating there is a previous / next page.
4. Title list icon: Indicates a type of the displayed title
list.
+VR : +VR mode
ORG : VR (Original)
PL : VR (Playlist)
Video : Video mode
5. Title name
6. Title information: Displays various information on
the selected title.
7. Submenu: Submenus for the selected menu are
displayed here.
8. Title name (editable): If you do not name the title,
the recorded date, time and the recording mode are
displayed here.
9. Progress bar: Indicating the progress of the playback.
The vertical lines in the bar indicates chapter marks,
and “L” sliding on the bar indicates current point of
playback displayed in the preview window.
10. Preview window: Preview of the selected title is
displayed here.
11. Playback status: Indicating the current playback
status of the selected title.
Edit the recorded disc
You will find editing discs is easy. This unit offers
convenient edit functions which are possible only with
DVD-RW/-R and DVD+RW/+R.
You can edit the following from a title list.
• Assigning a name to a title
• Dividing a title
• Combining titles
• Adding titles to a playlist
• Erasing all playlist
• Setting or releasing the title protection
• Adding or deleting chapter marks
• Deleting titles or parts of titles
(Possible editing functions depend on the recording
format and editing method.)
Original and playlist (VR mode)
For VR mode DVD-RW, you can edit the recordings in
playlist without changing the original recordings. Playlist
does not take up much disc space. After you make a
recording to VR mode DVD-RW, a playlist will be created
automatically.
What “Original” or “Playlist” is for?
Throughout this manual, you will find original and playlist
which refer to the actual content and the edited version.
• Original content refers to what’s actually recorded on
the VR mode DVD-RW.
• Playlist content refers to the edited version of the VR
mode DVD-RW; how the original content is to be played
back.
Finalizing a disc
• This will allow a disc that is recorded on this unit to be
played back on other DVD player — without finalization
it will not be playable on other DVD player.
• After finalizing a DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R, you cannot edit
any information that is on that disc.
• If you have recorded in DVD+RW, then editing is still
permitted after finalizing.
Using these editing functions to modify copyrighted
content for any purpose other than your private viewing
may be prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the
United States and other countries, and may subject you
to civil and criminal liability.
Press [RETURN] to exit the title list.
70
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 70
2007/12/18 17:10:59
Introduction
DELETING TITLES
Notes for deleting titles
After the disc is fully recorded:
DVD-RW/DVD+RW
The Full-Recorded disc
TITLE 2
TITLE 2
TITLE 3
TITLE 2
You cannot
record
a new title.
TITLE 3
TITLE 2
TITLE 2
TITLE 2
TITLE 3
Deleted titles
cannot create
the space.
Disc
Management
TITLE 3
Delete!
TITLE 1
You can record
a new title.
Basic Setup
Delete!
TITLE 1
TITLE 1
You can record
a new title.
TITLE 1
Delete!
TITLE 1
Delete!
• When a title is deleted from
DVD-R and DVD+R, the
recordable space will NOT be
increased.
The Full-Recorded disc
TITLE 1
TITLE 1
TITLE 2
• When the last title is deleted from
DVD-RW in video mode or DVD+RW, the
recordable space will be increased.
Connections
• When a title is deleted from
DVD-RW in VR mode, the
recordable disc space will
be increased.
The Full-Recorded disc
DVD-R/DVD+R
You cannot
record
a new title.
Recording
Once all editings are made, press [RETURN] several times to exit the editing mode. “Writing to Disc” appears
momentarily. It also appears when pressing [AOPEN/CLOSE] or [I/y
y ON/STANDBY] before exiting the editing
mode after editing.
Note
+VR
Title List
+VR
JAN/21/08 7:00AM L1 SLP
7:00AM (2:00:00)
JAN/21/08
Title List
EMPTY TITLE
SLP
1
2
3
4
5
6
Empty
1
1Delete the
title No.5
2
3
Editing
Empty
Playback
• If you delete the title in DVD+RW, deleted title will be displayed as “Empty”.
• You cannot overwrite on the “Empty”
• For DVD+RW, if “Empty” appears right next to the other “Empty”, those “Empty” combines into one.
4
Empty
1/1
1/1
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 71
71
2007/12/18 17:11:00
DELETING TITLES
You can delete titles which you do not need anymore.
Please be advised that the titles once deleted cannot be
brought back to the disc.
Be sure to read “Notes for deleting titles” on page 71
before you delete the title.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
1
2
Press [DVD].
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].
Title list, original or playlist will appear.
• For VR mode DVD-RW, press [DISC MENU] to
switch between “Original” and “Playlist”.
Use [K / L/ s / B] to select a desired
title, then press [ENTER].
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW original
ORG
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
L1 LP
1
2
3
4
5
6
1/2
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
3
Use [K / L] to select “Title Delete”,
then press [ENTER].
ORG
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
1
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
4
L1 LP
2
3
Play From Start
Edit
Title Delete
5
Add To Playlist
6
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
1/2
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
4
ZOOM
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
ORG
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
1
2
L1 LP
3
Delete this title?
4
SE-R0295
Yes
5
No
6
1/2
After that, “Are you sure?” will appear, select
“Yes” and then press [ENTER].
Title will be deleted.
5
Press [RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
Writing to Disc
90%
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
72
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 72
2007/12/18 17:11:01
Introduction
CREATING/DELETING PLAYLIST
Adding Titles to a Playlist
Playlist
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
ORG
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
1
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
Use [K / L] to select “Add To
Playlist”, then press [ENTER].
DISPLAY
4
L1 LP
2
Disc
Management
.@/:
Use [K / L/ s / B] to select the
desired title, then press [ENTER].
Basic Setup
OPEN/
CLOSE
1
2
3
Connections
For VR mode DVD-RW, you can create the playlist as you
wish.
You can add up to 99 titles to a playlist (as long as
the total number of the playlist does not exceed 999
chapters).
Follow the step 1 in “DELETING
TITLES” on page 72 to display the
original.
3
Play From Start
Edit
Title Delete
5
Add To Playlist
6
AUDIO
1/2
DISC MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
4
ORG
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
1
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
ZOOM
6
1/2
The title is added to playlist.
5
Press [RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Editing
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
Yes
5
No
Playback
PLAY
3
Create a Playlist ?
4
REV
L1 LP
2
Recording
ENTER
CLEAR
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
SE-R0295
Function Setup
VCR Function
Note
Others
• To delete a title from the playlist, refer to “DELETING
TITLES” on page 72.
• To delete all titles in the playlist, refer to “Erasing All
Playlist” on page 74.
• When a playlist contains 99 titles or more, or 999
chapters or more, “Add to Playlist” cannot be
selected.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 73
73
2007/12/18 17:11:03
CREATING/DELETING PLAYLIST
Erasing All Playlist
Playlist
A playlist can be deleted if it is no longer needed.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
Main menu will appear.
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,
then press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Delete All
Playlists”, then press [ENTER].
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Delete All Playlists
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
4
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1
2
3
Press [DVD].
Press [SETUP].
PLAY
FWD
DVD Menu
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Delete entire playlist?
Delete All Playlist
Yes
No
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
“Are you sure?” will appear.
Use [K / L] to select “Yes” and then press
[ENTER].
DVD Menu
SE-R0295
Format
Finalize
Disc Protect OFF ON
Delete
play list?
Areentire
you sure?
Delete All Playlist
Yes
No
Playlist is deleted.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Note
• Deleting a playlist will not increase the available
recording time on the disc.
74
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 74
2007/12/18 17:11:04
Introduction
EDITING DISCS
Putting Names on Titles
SETUP
DISPLAY
AUDIO
4
Use [K / L] to select “Edit Title
Name”, then press [ENTER].
ORG
Edit
1
DISC MENU
Connections
You can put a name on the disc and change it from this
menu.
TOP MENU
Scene Delete
Edit Title Name
Chapter Mark
Protect
Basic Setup
ENTER
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
5
To enter a title name, follow the
steps of “Guide to Edit Title Name”
on page 76.
ORG
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
REC MODE
REC
Edit - Edit Title Name
1
A B C
a b c
DUBBING
1 2 3
@ !
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
character set
?
ZOOM
1 : 25 : 47
SE-R0295
area for entering title names
Title list, original or playlist will appear.
• For VR mode DVD-RW, press [DISC MENU] to
switch between “Original” and “Playlist”.
When you finish entering a title name, press
[ENTER].
6
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
ORG
Edit - Edit Title Name
Use [K / L/ s / B] to select a desired
title, then press [ENTER].
1
Yes
No
Editing
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW original
ORG
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
1
MY FAVORITE
L1 LP
2
1 : 25 : 47
3
5
6
1/2
ORG
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
VCR Function
3
Use [K / L] to select “Edit”, then press
[ENTER].
7
Press [RETURN] and then [RETURN] or
[STOP C] to exit.
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
1
4
2
Play From Start
Edit
Title Delete
5
Add To Playlist
L1 LP
3
6
Others
1/2
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 75
Function Setup
The name you entered will be activated for the title.
4
Playback
Press [DVD].
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].
Recording
M
1
2
Disc
Management
REV
1 : 25 : 47
75
2007/12/18 17:11:06
EDITING DISCS
Putting Names on Titles (cont’d)
Guide to Edit Title Name
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1) Use [K / L] to select a desired character set, then
press [ENTER].
2) Follow the list below, use [the Number buttons]
repeatedly until the desired letter appears.
Select
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
Press
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
ABC
abc
123
@!?
<space>
<space>
0
<space>
(*1)
(*1)
1
! ”# $ % & ’( )
*+,-./:;<=>
?@[]^_{|}
ABC
abc
2
(*2)
DEF
def
3
(*2)
GHI
ghi
4
(*2)
JKL
jkl
5
(*2)
MNO
mno
6
(*2)
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PQRS
pqrs
7
(*2)
REV
PLAY
FWD
TUV
tuv
8
(*2)
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
WXYZ
wxyz
9
(*2)
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
SE-R0295
ZOOM
*1 Press
, character set will be changed to the “ @!? ”
mode automatically.
to
, character set will be changed to the
*2 Press
previous input mode automatically.
• To delete letters, press [CLEAR] repeatedly.
Press and hold [CLEAR] to delete all letters.
• Use [s / B] to move the cursor to the left and right.
• You can enter up to 30 letters.
Note
• Undefined letters in a title name are shown by “*”. If
you delete them, adjoining letters may change to “*”
or other.
76
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 76
2007/12/18 17:11:08
Introduction
EDITING DISCS
Setting Chapter Marks
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
Submenu will appear.
Use [SKIP H / G],
[REV E], [FWD D], [PLAY B] and
[PAUSE F] to find the point where
you will create a new chapter mark.
Or, use [SKIP H / G] to find a
chapter mark that you wish to delete.
AUDIO
TOP MENU
4
ENTER
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW original
ORG
1
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
Edit - Chapter Mark
RETURN
Chapter
Recording
CLEAR
Use [K / L] to select “Add” or
“Delete”, then press [ENTER].
Disc
Management
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
Use [K / L] to select “Chapter Mark”,
then press [ENTER].
Basic Setup
OPEN/
CLOSE
1
2
3
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Putting Names
on Titles” on page 75 to display “Edit”
menu.
Connections
You can put chapter marks in each title. Once a chapter is
marked, you can use it for the chapter search feature.
Add
Delete
2/3
FWD
PLAY
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
1 : 25 : 47
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
5
If you select “Add” at step 4, a new chapter mark
will be added, and if you select “Delete” at step
4, the chapter mark will be deleted.
e.g.) Add
ORG
Edit - Chapter Mark - Add
1
Yes
No
2/3
Function Setup
Chapter
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
1 : 25 : 47
A new chapter mark will be added.
6
7
Press [RETURN].
Press [RETURN] again and then
[RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
Others
• Maximum numbers of chapter for each DVD:
VR mode DVD : 999 chapters per entire original
and playlist
+VR mode DVD : 254 chapters per disc, 99 chapters
per title
• Besides the above-mentioned, it is not likely to be
able to add according to recorded time and number
of chapters.
VCR Function
Note
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 77
Editing
SE-R0295
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
Playback
SKIP
77
2007/12/18 17:11:09
EDITING DISCS
Hiding Chapters
You can hide chapters from the title list.
Hidden chapters are skipped during playback.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
+VR
Title List
JAN/15/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/15/08
L1 LP
1
2
3
4
5
6
1/2
3
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
2
Use [K / L/ s / B] to select a desired
title, then press [ENTER].
AUDIO
Use [K / L] to select “Edit”, then
press [ENTER].
+VR
Title List
JAN/15/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/15/08
TOP MENU
1
4
L1 LP
2
3
Play From Start
Edit
Title Delete
5
6
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
1/2
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
1
4
5
6
ZOOM
Use [K / L] to select “Hide Chapter”,
then press [ENTER].
Submenu will appear.
Use [SKIP H] or [SKIP G] to decide
the chapter to be hidden.
Use [K / L] to select “Hidden”, then
press [ENTER].
+VR
Edit - Hide Chapter
1
Press [DVD].
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].
Chapter
Visible
Hidden
2 / 3 Hidden
Title list will appear.
JAN/15/08 12:00AM L1 LP
Note
1 : 25 : 47
• ”Hidden” will be displayed in the preview window
while previewing the hidden chapter.
• When you make all chapters in the title “Hidden”,
“Hidden” is displayed in a thumbnail of the title list.
+VR
Title List
JAN/15/08 12:00AM L1 LP
--:-- (2:00:00)
---/--/--
1
2
LP
3
7
After this operation is completed,
press [RETURN] thrice to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Hidden
4
Empty
1/1
78
If you want hidden chapters to be “Visible”,
select the chapter to be shown. Then use
[K / L] to select “Visible”, then press [ENTER]
at the step 6 above.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 78
2007/12/18 17:11:11
Introduction
EDITING DISCS
Deleting a Part of a Title
Original
Playlist
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
Use [K / L] to select “Scene Delete”,
then press [ENTER].
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW playlist.
PL
Edit
1
SETUP
DISPLAY
AUDIO
Disc
Management
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
Scene Delete
Edit Title Name
Chapter Mark
Title Dividing
Title Combining
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
1 : 25 : 47
DISC MENU
TOP MENU
Recording
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
Playback
REV
Basic Setup
OPEN/
CLOSE
1
2
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Putting
Names on Titles” on page 75 to
display “Edit” menu.
Connections
You can delete a specific part of a title.
Even when parts of title are deleted from the playlist, the
original title will remain as it is.
ZOOM
Editing
SE-R0295
Function Setup
Instructions continue on the next page.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 79
Others
• When a scene is deleted from an original, the playlist
related to the original will be deleted.
• You cannot select “Scene Delete” if the number of
chapter marks in the original or playlist is more than
999. (Depends on the content, there is a case that
you cannot select “Scene Delete” before the number
of chapter marks reaches 999.)
• The recordable disc space will not increase even after
deleting a part of a title on the playlist.
VCR Function
Note
79
2007/12/27 16:30:19
EDITING DISCS
Deleting a Part of a Title (cont’d)
3
Use [SKIP H / G],
[REV E], [FWD D], [PLAY B] and
[PAUSE F] to find the start point,
then press [ENTER].
PL
4
Use [K / L] to select “Delete” then
press [ENTER].
PL
Edit - Scene Delete
1
Edit - Scene Delete
1
Start
End
Preview
Delete
Start
End
Preview
Delete
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
1 : 47 : 00
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
1 : 25 : 47
Then use [SKIP H / G],
[REV E], [FWD D], [PLAY B] and
[PAUSE F] again to move to the end
point, and press [ENTER].
PL
5
Use [K / L] to select “Yes” then press
[ENTER].
“Are you sure?” will appear. Select “Yes” using
[K / L] and then press [ENTER].
PL
Edit - Scene Delete
1
Edit - Scene Delete
1
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Start
End
Preview
Delete
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
1 : 50 : 00
The part of the title is deleted.
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
1 : 45 : 00
The cursor will move to “Preview”.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the
total and the elapsed time of the title, and the
area selected for deletion is indicated in red.
You can check the preview by pressing [ENTER].
• Before and after 5 seconds of the deleted point
will be playback for preview.
6
Press [RETURN] and then [RETURN] or
[STOP C] to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
start point end point
Before
editing
Edited
80
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 80
2007/12/18 17:11:15
Introduction
EDITING DISCS
Dividing a Title
Playlist
3
Use [K / L] to select “Edit”, then
press [ENTER].
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW playlist
PL
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 1/08
HDMI
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
4
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
4
5
6
Use [SKIP H], [SKIP G], [REV E],
[FWD D], [PAUSE F] and [PLAY B]
to decide the point at which you will
divide the title.
Use [K / L] to select “Title Dividing”,
then press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW playlist
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
Edit - Title Dividing
1
Playback
VCR
6
1/2
PL
PAUSE
5
Recording
CLEAR
3
Play From Start
Edit
Title Delete
Disc
Management
SETUP
L1 LP
2
Basic Setup
.@/:
Connections
You can divide one title into two new titles.
Yes
No
ZOOM
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
1 : 25 : 47
For DVD+RW: Data will be written onto the disc
momentarily.
Press [DVD].
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].
• For VR mode DVD-RW, press [DISC MENU] to
select “Playlist”.
Writing to Disc
Function Setup
90%
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Use [K / L/ s / B] to select a desired
title, then press [ENTER].
Note
7
Press [RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Others
• You cannot divide a title of the disc when the
number of recording titles reaches the maximum of
99 (-RW) or 49 (+RW), and the number of recording
chapters reaches the maximum of 999 (-RW) or 254
(+RW).
For VR mode DVD-RW: Proceed to step 7.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 81
VCR Function
1
2
Editing
The title will be divided into two new titles.
Both title names are identical.
SE-R0295
81
2007/12/18 17:11:15
EDITING DISCS
Combining Titles
Playlist
You can combine two titles into a single title.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
1
2
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Dividing a
Title” on page 81 to display “Edit”
menu.
Use [K / L] to select “Title
Combining”, then press [ENTER].
PL
Edit
1
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
Scene Delete
Edit Title Name
Chapter Mark
Title Dividing
Title Combining
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
SPACE
SETUP
1 : 25 : 47
TIMER
PROG.
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
Title combining setting window will appear.
Selected title grays out, and the frame of the
next title becomes yellow.
AUDIO
TOP MENU
PL
Edit - Title Combining
JAN/31/08 11:00PM L1 LP
11:00PM (0:30:00) JAN/31/08
L1 LP
1
2
3
4
5
6
ENTER
1+
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
1/6
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
3
4
Use [K / L / { / B] to select another
title to combine, then press [ENTER].
Selection menu will appear.
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
PL
Edit - Title Combining
JAN/31/08 11:00PM L1 LP
11:00PM (0:30:00) JAN/31/08
1
SE-R0295
1+2
L1 LP
2
3
Combine selected titles?
4
Yes
5
No
6
1/6
The two titles will combine into a single title.
PL
Title List
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
12:00AM (2:30:00) JAN/ 1/08
L1 LP
1
2
3
4
5
6
1/6
Note
• You cannot select the same title twice and combine
it into a single title.
• If either one of the two original titles is deleted, the
combined new title is also deleted.
82
5
Press [RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 82
2007/12/18 17:11:18
Introduction
EDITING DISCS
Setting or Releasing the Title Protection
Original
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
Use [K / L] to select “Protect”, then
press [ENTER].
ORG
Edit
1
Basic Setup
OPEN/
CLOSE
1
2
Connections
To prevent the accidental editing, or erasing of the titles,
you can protect them in “Edit” menu.
You can cancel the title protection feature after it is
applied.
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Putting
Names on Titles” on page 75 to
display “Edit” menu.
Scene Delete
Edit Title Name
Chapter Mark
Protect
TRACKING
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
TUV
SAT.LINK
WXYZ
SETUP
• If the title is protected,
the original list.
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
Confirm the indication
“OFF ON”. Press [ENTER] again.
• If the title is already protected, “ON OFF” will
appear. If you press [ENTER], the title will be
released from protection.
ENTER
ORG
CLEAR
Edit - Protect
RETURN
1
OFF
Recording
3
icon will appear in
Disc
Management
1 : 25 : 47
PQRS
ON
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
Playback
REV
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
PAUSE
VCR
1 : 25 : 47
•
DVD
icon will appear on the title in the original
list.
DUBBING
REC MODE
SE-R0295
ZOOM
4
Press [RETURN] and then [RETURN] or
[STOP C] to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
Function Setup
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Editing
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
REC
To protect a whole disc
(VR mode DVD-RW, DVD+RW/+R
only):
VCR Function
Select “Disc Protect OFF ON” from the DVD
Menu, then select “Yes”.
Refer to “SETTING A DISC TO PROTECT” on
page 29.
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 83
83
2007/12/18 17:11:19
EDITING DISCS
Setting or Clearing All Chapter Marks at Once
For titles in video mode DVD, you can set or edit chapter
at every time interval. You can clear the chapter mark too.
You can specify the interval of chapter marks for titles last
more than 5 minutes.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
1
2
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Putting
Names on Titles” on page 75 to
display “Edit” menu.
Use [K / L] to select “Chapter Mark”,
then press [ENTER].
Video
Edit
1
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
Edit Title Name
Chapter Mark
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1 : 25 : 47
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
3
Use [K / L] to select the desired
interval, then press [ENTER].
Video
Edit - Chapter Mark
1
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
JAN/ 1/08 12:00AM L1 LP
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
SE-R0295
OFF
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
1 : 25 : 47
4
5
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press
[ENTER].
Chapter marks are added.
If you select “OFF” at step 3, all the chapter
marks are erased.
Press [RETURN] and then [RETURN] or
[STOP C] to exit.
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.
This operation may take
awhile to be completed.
Note
• You cannot select a chapter mark interval that
exceeds the length of a title.
• The length of chapters may slightly deviate from the
one specified at the step 3.
• A chapter mark may be delayed depending on the
recording content.
• Maximum number of chapter for video mode DVD is
99 chapters per title.
• The interval for auto chapter may be up to two
minutes different from the time option you set.
84
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 84
2007/12/27 16:30:21
Introduction
LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS
The following table is the contents which you can set and the default settings.
Refer to the following table for useful operation.
Setup
Playback
Audio Out
→ page 89
Compressing the range of sound volume.
PCM
48kHz
96kHz
PCM
Stream
ON
OFF
Set whether the sound recorded in 96kHz will be
down sampled in 48kHz.
Set the type of sound signal which outputs from
the digital audio output jack.
Set whether DTS signal is output or not.
English
French
Spanish
Other
Set the language for disc menu language.
Audio Language
→ page 90
Original
English
French
Spanish
Other
Set the language for audio.
Subtitle Language
→ page 90
OFF
English
French
Spanish
Other
Set the language for subtitles.
Angle Icon
→ page 90
ON
OFF
Set whether to display the angle icon or not.
Still Mode
→ page 90
Auto
Field
Frame
Set the type of still image in pausing playback.
OSD Language
→ page 91
English
Français
Español
OFF
5minutes
10minutes
15minutes
30miniutes
Auto
Bright
Dark
Set the language for OSD (on-screen display).
MPAA Rating
→ page 92
X
NC-17
R
PG-13
PG
G
NR
Set the viewing limitation according to MPAA
rating.
TV Rating
→ page 92
TV-MA
TV-14
TV-PG
TV-G
TV-Y7
TV-Y
Set the viewing limitation according to TV rating.
VCR Function
Set the viewing limitation according to Canadian
French Rating.
Function Setup
Canadian French Rating 18 ans+
→ page 92
16 ans+
13 ans+
8 ans+
G
E
Set the brightness of the front panel display.
Editing
V-Chip
Set the idling time before the screen saver starts.
Playback
FL Dimmer
→ page 91
Recording
Screen Saver
→ page 91
Disc
Management
Disc Menu Language
→ page 90
Basic Setup
ON
OFF
DTS
General Setting
Contents
Set the parental level for DVD playback.
Dynamic Range Control
Dolby Digital
Display
OFF
level 8 [Adult] to
1 [Kid Safe]
Connections
Items (highlight is the default)
Parental Lock
→ page 88
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 85
85
2007/12/18 17:11:22
LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS
Setup
Display
Video
General Setting
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
→ page 98
Items (highlight is the default)
V-Chip
Canadian English Rating 18+
→ page 92
14+
PG
G
C8+
C
E
Change Password
→ page 93
Progressive
ON
→ page 94
OFF
TV Aspect
4:3 Letter Box
→ page 94
4:3 Pan & Scan
16:9 Wide
Select Video Select Video - L1(Rear)
Video In
→ page 20
S-Video In
Auto Chapter
OFF
→ page 34
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
Recording Audio Select (XP)
PCM
→ page 35
Dolby Digital
Disc Full
ON
Auto
Finalize
OFF
→ page 30 End of Timer Rec
ON
OFF
Aspect Ratio (Video mode)
Auto
→ page 35
4:3
16:9
Dubbing Mode
VCR DVD
→ page 49
DVD VCR
Make Recording Compatible
ON
→ page 34
OFF
Clock Setting → page 26
DivX®VOD → page 95
DivX Subtitle
OFF
→ page 95
English
French
Spanish
German
Italian
Swedish
Dutch
Russian1
Russian2
Hungarian
Polish
Czech
Format
RGB
→ page 96
YCbCr
HDMI Audio
ON
→ page 97
OFF
RGB Range
Normal
→ page 97
Enhanced
Yes
No
Contents
Set the viewing limitation according to Canadian
English Rating.
Change the password.
Set to the progressive scan mode (set to "ON") or
to the interlace scan mode (set to "OFF").
Set a picture size according to aspect ratio of your
TV.
Set the video input type for the external input.
Insert chapter marks at even time interval.
Set the recording audio type. (Only when the rec
mode is set to XP.)
Set the unit to finalize the disc automatically.
Set a aspect ratio for video mode recording.
Set the VCR to DVD (DVD to VCR) duplication.
Set to prohibit additional recording (OFF) or to
replace the title list after recording (ON).
Set the clock.
Provide DivX®VOD registration code.
Set the language for DivX® Subtitle.
Set the color space for the HDMI output.
Set whether to output the HDMI audio signal or
not.
Set the black-white contrast level for HDMI RGB
output.
Set to the default setting.
Note
• Your change to each settings stays on even when the power is off.
• An item which is not currently available is grayed in the settings.
86
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 86
2007/12/18 17:11:22
Introduction
GENERAL SETTING
Playback
Press [STOP C] if you are playing back a disc.
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
3
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,
then press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Playback”, then
press [ENTER].
General Setting
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
Disc
Management
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1
2
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
Parental Lock
Audio Out
Disc Menu Language
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Angle Icon
Still Mode
Submenu will appear.
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
SE-R0295
ZOOM
When you finish with the setting,
press [SETUP] to exit.
Editing
4
5
Refer 1 to 7 on pages 88 to 90 and
set the selected item.
Playback
PAUSE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Recording
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
Basic Setup
INPUT
SELECT
Connections
OPEN/
CLOSE
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to
select “General Setting“, then press
[ENTER].
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 87
87
2007/12/18 17:11:22
GENERAL SETTING
Playback (cont’d)
1
Parental Lock (Default: OFF)
Some DVD-video feature a parental lock level. Playback
will stop if the ratings exceed the levels you set, it will
require you to enter a password before the disc will
playback. This feature prevents your children from
viewing inappropriate material.
Use [K / L] to select the desired level, then press
[ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
OFF Parental Lock
Audio Out
8 [Adult]
7 [NCDisc
17] Menu Language
6 [R]Audio Language
Language
5 [PGSubtitle
R]
4 [PGAngle
13] Icon
Still Mode
3 [PG]
2 [G]
1 [Kid Safe]
RATING EXPLANATIONS
• OFF : Parental Control is inactive; all discs can play.
• 8 [ADULT]: DVD software of any grades (adult/general/
children) can be played back.
• 7 [NC-17]: No one under 17 admitted.
• 6 [R]: Restricted; under 17 requires accompanying
parent or adult guardian.
• 5 [PG R]: Parental Guidance Recommended.
• 4 [PG13]: Unsuitable for children under 13.
• 3 [PG]: Parental Guidance suggested.
• 2 [G]: General Audience.
• 1 [Kid Safe]: Suitable for children.
Note
• Parental lock function may not be available to some
discs.
• With some DVD, it may be difficult to find if they are
compatible with parental lock. Be sure to check if the
parental lock function operates in the way that you
have set.
• Record the password in case you forget it.
• If there is a DVD in the unit when you set up the
parental lock, press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to activate the
parental lock level.
A password has not been set yet.
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press [ENTER]. Use
[the Number buttons] to enter a new password except
for 4737, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Parental Lock
If a password has not been set yet, proceed to A .
If a password has been set already, proceed to B .
88
A
General Setting
Parental Lock
OFF Parental Lock
Audio Out
8 [Adult]
Change
Password?
7 [NCDisc
17] Menu Language
Audio Language
6 [R]Yes
Subtitle
Language
No
5 [PG
R]
4 [PGAngle
13] Icon
Still Mode
3 [PG]
2 [G]
1 [Kid Safe]
Yes
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Parental Lock
OFF Parental Lock
Audio Out
8 [Adult]
7 [NCDisc
17] Menu Language
Password
Input
6 [R]Audio Language
Language
5 [PGSubtitle
R]
4 [PGAngle
13] Icon
Still Mode
3 [PG]
2 [G]
1 [Kid Safe]
Your setting will be activated.
B
A password has been set already.
• Use [the Number buttons] to enter the current
password.
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Parental Lock
OFF Parental Lock
Audio Out
8 [Adult]
7 [NCDisc
17] Menu Language
Password
Input
6 [R]Audio Language
Language
5 [PGSubtitle
R]
4 [PGAngle
13] Icon
Still
3 [PG] Mode
2 [G]
1 [Kid Safe]
Your setting will be activated.
• If you want to change password, use [K / L] to select
“Yes” then press [ENTER]. Use [the Number buttons]
to enter a new password, then press [ENTER].
<change the password>
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
General Setting
Parental Lock
OFF Parental Lock
Audio Out
8 [Adult]
Change
Password?
7 [NCDisc
17] Menu Language
Audio Language
6 [R]Yes
Subtitle
Language
No
5 [PG
R]
4 [PGAngle
13] Icon
Still Mode
3 [PG]
2 [G]
1 [Kid Safe]
Yes
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Parental Lock
OFF Parental Lock
Audio Out
8 [Adult]
7 [NCDisc
17] Menu Language
Password
Input
6 [R]Audio Language
Language
5 [PGSubtitle
R]
4 [PGAngle
13] Icon
Still Mode
3 [PG]
2 [G]
1 [Kid Safe]
Your setting will be activated.
Note
• Press [CLEAR] to erase numbers entered incorrectly.
• When you forget the password or you want to clear
all settings in “Parental Lock” menu, enter 4,7,3,7
using [the Number buttons] in password input
window. Password will be cleared and parental levels
will be set to “OFF”.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 88
2007/12/18 17:11:23
Introduction
GENERAL SETTING
Playback (cont’d)
2
C
Audio Out
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Use [K / L] to select a desired item, then press [ENTER].
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
General Setting
Dynamic Range Control (Default : ON)
Set to “ON” to compress the range between soft and loud sounds.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Parental Lock
Audio Out Audio Out
Menu
Language
Dynamic Disc
Range
Control
Dynamic Range
AudioControl
Language
PCM ON Subtitle Language
DolbyOFF
Digital
Angle Icon
DTS
Still Mode
Your setting will be activated.
D
Settings for DTS (Default : OFF)
Select a setting using [K / L], then press [ENTER].
Recording
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Your setting will be activated.
PCM
: Converts the Dolby Digital into PCM (2 channel).
When your amplifier/decoder is NOT
compatible with Dolby Digital, set to “PCM”.
Stream : Outputs Dolby Digital signals.
When your amplifier/decoder is compatible
with Dolby Digital, set to “Stream”.
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Parental Lock
Audio Out Audio Out
DTS
Disc Menu Language
Dynamic Range
AudioControl
Language
PCM ON Subtitle Language
DolbyOFF
Digital
Angle Icon
DTS
Still Mode
B
Settings for PCM (Default : 48kHz)
General Setting
Parental Lock
Audio Out Audio Out
Disc Menu Language
PCM
Dynamic Range
AudioControl
Language
PCM 48kHz
Subtitle Language
Dolby96kHz
Digital
Angle Icon
DTS
Still Mode
Function Setup
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Editing
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
Your setting is activated.
ON
: Outputs DTS signals.
If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with
DTS, set to “ON”.
OFF
: No DTS signal is output.
If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible
with DTS, set to “OFF”.
Playback
Note
• Dynamic range control function is available only on
the discs which are recorded in the Dolby Digital
format.
Disc
Management
A
A
B
C
D
Parental Lock
Audio Out Audio Out
Disc Menu Language
Dynamic Range
AudioControl
Language
PCM
Subtitle Language
Dolby Digital
Angle Icon
DTS
Still Mode
Parental Lock
Audio Out Audio Out
Disc Menu Language
Dolby Digital
Dynamic Range
AudioControl
Language
PCM PCMSubtitle Language
DolbyStream
Digital
Angle Icon
DTS
Still Mode
Basic Setup
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Connections
Choose the appropriate audio setting for your external device.
It will only affect a disc playback.
Settings for Dolby Digital (Default : Stream)
VCR Function
Your setting will be activated.
48kHz : If your amplifier/decoder is NOT compatible
with 96kHz PCM, select “48kHz”. 96kHz sound
will be output in 48kHz.
96kHz : If your amplifier/decoder is compatible with
96kHz PCM, select “96kHz”. 96kHz sound will
be output.
Note
Others
When playing back disc with copyright protection
• Even if you select “96kHz”, the sound will be down
sampled at 48kHz.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 89
89
2007/12/18 17:11:24
GENERAL SETTING
Playback (cont’d)
3
Disc Menu Language (Default : English)
Set the language for disc menu.
Use [K / L] to select a language, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Parental Lock
Out
Disc Menu Audio
Language
Disc Menu Language
EnglishAudio Language
FrenchSubtitle Language
Spanish
Angle Icon
Other Still Mode
Note
• Only the languages supported by the disc can be
selected.
• Audio language setting may not be available to
some discs.
• You can also change or switch off the subtitles on a
DVD from the disc menu if it is available.
• Press [CLEAR] to erase numbers entered incorrectly.
6
Set to “ON” to show the angle icon during the playback.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
Your setting will be activated.
4
Angle Icon (Default : ON)
Audio Language (Default : Original)
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Set the audio language.
Use [K / L] to select a language, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Parental Lock
Audio Out
Audio Language
Disc Menu Language
Original
Audio Language
EnglishSubtitle Language
FrenchAngle Icon
Spanish
Still Mode
Other
Your setting will be activated.
7
Your setting will be activated.
• When “Original” is selected, the audio language will be
in the disc’s default language.
5
Parental Lock
Audio Out
Angle IconDisc Menu Language
Audio Language
ON Subtitle Language
OFF Angle Icon
Still Mode
Still Mode (Default : Auto)
Select “Auto” usually.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Subtitle Language (Default : OFF)
Set the subtitle language.
Use [K / L] to select a language, then press [ENTER].
Parental Lock
Still Mode Audio Out
Disc Menu Language
Auto Audio Language
Field Subtitle Language
Frame Angle Icon
Still Mode
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Parental Lock
Audio Out
Subtitle Language
Disc Menu Language
OFF Audio Language
EnglishSubtitle Language
FrenchAngle Icon
Spanish
Still Mode
Other
Your setting will be activated.
Auto
: Optimum resolution setting (“Field” or
“Frame”) will be selected.
Field
: Images in the still mode will be stabilized.
Frame : Images in the still mode will be highly defined.
Note
Your setting will be activated.
If “Other” is selected for 3 to
using [the Number buttons].
5 , press 4-digit code
• Frame is one completed video image made up of two
fields (There are 30 frames per second of NTSC video).
Code Input
-
-
-
-
• When you finish entering the code, press [ENTER].
Refer to the language code table on page 106.
90
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 90
2007/12/18 17:11:25
Introduction
GENERAL SETTING
Display
1
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
Set the language for the on-screen display.
Use [K / L] to select a language, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
OSD Language
Screen Saver
OSD Language
FL Dimmer
EnglishV-Chip
Français
Español
Basic Setup
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
RETURN
Screen Saver (Default : 10 minutes)
Set the time to activate the screen saver function on the
TV screen.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
ZOOM
Your setting will be activated.
3
Playback
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
OSD Language
Screen Saver
Screen Saver
FL Dimmer
OFF V-Chip
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
Recording
REV
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Disc
Management
ENTER
CLEAR
Your setting will be activated.
2
Connections
OPEN/
CLOSE
OSD Language (Default : English)
FL Dimmer (Default: Bright)
Set the front panel display brightness.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
SE-R0295
General Setting
Use [K / L] to select “Display”, then
press [ENTER].
Function Setup
You can choose one from “Auto”, “Bright” or “Dark”.
If “Auto” is selected, the display gets dark when the
power is off.
VCR Function
1
2
3
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to
select “General Setting”, then press
[ENTER].
OSD Language
FL DimmerScreen Saver
FL Dimmer
Auto V-Chip
Bright
Dark
Editing
Press [STOP C] if you are playing back a disc.
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,
then press [ENTER].
1
2
3
4
OSD Language
Screen Saver
FL Dimmer
V-Chip
Others
Submenu will appear.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 91
91
2007/12/18 17:11:26
GENERAL SETTING
Display (cont’d)
4
V-Chip
With the v-chip system in this unit, you can set the
viewing limitation for the analog TV programs received
from the external tuner or recorded on DVDs to prevent
your children from watching inappropriate programs. If
the unit detects a blocked program, a restriction message
appears and you are not allowed to view the program.
And be noted that the recorded contents on the cassette
tape are not blocked. In such a case you can block them
in the v-chip settings on your TV.
1) Use [the Number buttons] to enter the access
password.
If you have not set the password, first, use [the
Number buttons] to set the access password, then
press [ENTER]. The number you entered will be stored
as the access password.
A
B
C
D
MPAA Rating
TV Rating
Canadian French Rating
Canadian English Rating
You can set the viewing limitation according to MPAA
rating (US movie ratings), TV Rating (US TV program
ratings), Canadian French Rating, Canadian English Rating.
1) Use [K / L] to select the desired rating, then press
[ENTER] repeatedly to switch between view and
block. When it is blocked a key icon will appear.
e.g.) MPAA rating
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
OSD Language
Screen Saver
FL Dimmer
Password
Input
V-Chip
OSD Language
Screen Saver
MPAA Rating
FL Dimmer
V-Chip
X V-Chip
MPAA Rating
NC-17
TV Rating
R
CanadianPG-13
French Rating
CanadianPG
English Rating
Change Password
G
NR
[MPAA Rating]
2) Use [K / L] to select a desired item, then press
[ENTER].
Rating
Mature audience only
NC-17
No one under 17 admitted
R
Restricted; under 17 requires
accompanying parent or adult guardian
PG-13
Unsuitable for children under 13
PG
Parental guidance suggested
G
General audience
NR
No rating
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
OSD Language
Screen Saver
FL Dimmer
V-Chip
V-Chip
A MPAA Rating
B TV Rating
C Canadian French Rating
D Canadian English Rating
E Change Password
Category
X
higher
lower
[TV Rating]
Rating
Category
TV-MA
Mature audience only
TV-14
Unsuitable for children under 14
TV-PG
Parental guidance suggested
TV-G
General audience
TV-Y7
Appropriate for all children 7 and older
TV-Y
Appropriate for all children
higher
lower
[Canadian French Rating]
Rating
18 ans+
92
Category
Adult audience only
16 ans+
Unsuitable for ages under 16
13 ans+
Unsuitable for ages under 13
8 ans+
Unsuitable for ages under 8
G
General audience
E
Exempt program
higher
lower
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 92
2007/12/18 17:11:28
Introduction
GENERAL SETTING
Display (cont’d)
[Canadian English Rating]
Rating
Adult audience only
higher
Change Password
Change the current password.
Use [the Number Buttons] to enter new access
password.
Connections
18+
E
Category
Unsuitable for ages under 14
Parental guidance suggested
G
General audience
Note
C8+
For children over 8
C
For all children
E
Exempt program
• Press [CLEAR] to erase numbers entered incorrectly.
• When you forgot the access password, enter 4,7,3,7
using [the Number buttons] in password input
window. Password will be cleared.
lower
4
Press [SETUP] to exit.
Disc
Management
As for TV Rating’s TV-MA, TV-14, TV-PG, or TV-Y7, you
can further set the sub ratings to block specific
elements of programming. Press [K / L/ { / B] to select
the desired rating or sub rating, then press [ENTER]
repeatedly to switch between view and block. Sub
rating status will appear on the side of the main rating.
Basic Setup
14+
PG
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
TV Rating
Recording
OSD Language
FV V Saver
S L D
Screen
TV-MA FL Dimmer
V-Chip
V-Chip
TV-14
MPAA Rating
TV TV-PG
Rating
CAN French Rating
TV-G
CAN
English Rating
Change
TV-Y7Password
TV-Y
Sub Rating
Category
Rating
Fantasy Violence
TV-Y7
V
Violence
S
Sexual Situation
L
Coarse Language
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
D
Suggestive Dialogue
TV-PG, TV-14
Playback
FV
Note
Editing
• Changing the main rating to block or view
automatically changes all its sub ratings to the same
(block or view).
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 93
93
2007/12/18 17:11:28
GENERAL SETTING
Video
1
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
Progressive (Default : OFF)
This unit is compatible with the progressive scan system.
The feature provides you with the higher definition
images than the traditional output system does. To utilize
this feature, you must set progressive scan mode to “ON”.
1) Use [K / L] to select “ON“, then press [ENTER].
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
General Setting
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
AUDIO
TOP MENU
Progressive
TV Aspect
Progressive
Select Video
ON
OFF
2) Use [{ / B] to select “Yes“, then press [ENTER].
ENTER
CLEAR
General Setting
RETURN
Playback
Activating progressive scan:
Display
Progressive
Check your TV has progressive
scan
Video
TV Aspect
Progressive
and connect with
component
video cable.
Rcording
Select Video
ON
Clock
OFF
DivX
NOTE :
HDMI If there is no picture or picture is
Reset distorted
All
after selecting “Yes”,
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Wait about 15 seconds for auto recovery.
Activate?
SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
Press [STOP C] if you are playing back a disc.
1
2
3
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to
select “General Setting”, then press
[ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “Video”, then
press [ENTER].
94
No
3) Use [K / L] to select “Yes“ within 15 seconds, then
press [ENTER].
Your setting will be activated.
Note
• If your TV is compatible with progressive scan (480p), you
are recommended to use the HDMI or component video
cable (commercially available) to connect this unit to the
TV. (Refer to “Method 2” on page 21 or page 22.) If not, use
the RCA video cable and set the progressive scan to “OFF”.
• If the Progressive Scan image is distorted, you can
cancel Progressive Scan by pressing and holding
[SETUP] for more than 3 seconds during DVD
playback. The “Progressive” setting will be “OFF”.
• When selecting “No” or not pressing any buttons on
the unit or remote control within 15 seconds at step 3,
progressive scan remains to be “OFF” (interlace scan).
2
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,
then press [ENTER].
1 Progressive
2 TV Aspect
3 Select Video
Submenu will appear.
4
5
Yes
SKIP
Refer 1 to 2 on this page and set
the selected item.
• For 3 , refer to “SETTINGS FOR THE VIDEO
INPUT“ on page 20.
When you finish with the setting,
press [SETUP] to exit.
TV Aspect (Default: 4:3 Letter Box)
You can select the TV aspect ratio to match the formats of
what you are playing back with the unit and your TV
screen (4:3 standard or 16:9 widescreen TV).
Use [K / L] to select a desired option, then press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Progressive
TV Aspect TV Aspect
Select Video
4:3 Letter Box
4:3 Pan & Scan
16:9 Wide
If you have a standard TV:
Select “4:3 Letter Box”, so that black bars appear on the
top and bottom of the TV screen when playing back a
wide-screen picture. Select “4:3 Pan & Scan” for a full
height picture with both sides trimmed when playing
back wide-screen picture.
If you have a widescreen TV:
Select “16:9 Wide”.
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 94
2007/12/18 17:11:28
Introduction
GENERAL SETTING
DivX®
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
SETUP
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
AUDIO
TOP MENU
1 DivX R VOD
2 DivX Subtitle
DivX® VOD
General Setting
ENTER
CLEAR
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
ZOOM
SE-R0295
Note
• One registration code is only valid for one DivX® VOD
file.
• You must first download the file from the internet
and play it back on this unit before you are able to
get another code.
• You must follow this step every time you purchase or
rent a DivX® VOD file from the internet.
• For more information for DivX®, please visit
http://www.divx.com/vod.
• The registration code will be displayed in 8
characters consist of numbers between 0 to 9 and
capital letters chosen randomly.
2
DivX Subtitle (Default : OFF)
General Setting
DivX R VOD
DivX Subtitle
DivX Subtitle
OFF
English
French
Spanish
German
Italian
Swedish
VCR Function
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
General Setting
Your setting will be activated.
When you finish with the setting,
press [SETUP] to exit.
EN
Others
4
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 95
Function Setup
Set the DivX® subtitle.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “DivX”, then
press [ENTER].
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Editing
1
2
Press [SETUP] in stop mode and use
[K / L] to select “General Setting”,
then press [ENTER].
To learn more visit
www.divx.com/vod
Playback
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
Your registration code is :
Recording
REV
DivX R VOD
DivX R VOD
DivX Subtitle
Disc
Management
This unit allows you to play back the files purchased or
rented from DivX® VOD (video-on-demand) services. The
files are available on the internet. When you purchase or
rent DivX® VOD files on the internet, you will be asked to
enter an activation/registration code. This menu item
provides you with the activation/registration code.
On how to activate this unit for the DivX® VOD file
playback, visit www.divx.com/vod.
Basic Setup
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
1
Connections
3
OPEN/
CLOSE
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,
then press [ENTER].
95
2007/12/18 17:11:30
GENERAL SETTING
HDMI
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
TRACKING
SAT.LINK
WXYZ
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1
2
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
Press [SETUP] in stop mode and use
[K / L] to select “General Setting”,
then press [ENTER].
Use [K / L] to select “HDMI”, then
press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
AUDIO
TOP MENU
• You cannot select HDMI when an HDMI cable is
not connected and the item is shown in grey
color.
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
ZOOM
3
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,
then press [ENTER].
4
When you finish with the setting,
press [SETUP] to exit.
1
SE-R0295
1 Format
2 HDMI Audio
3 RGB Range
Format (Default : RGB)
You can select the color space for HDMI output.
Set the appropriate color space for your display device.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
• When the connected device is not compatible with the
Y/Cb/Cr, HDMI signal is output as RGB regardless of the
setting.
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Format
HDMI Audio
RGB Range
RGB HDMI CEC
YCbCr
Format
Your setting will be activated.
96
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 96
2007/12/18 17:11:31
Introduction
GENERAL SETTING
HDMI (cont’d)
2
HDMI Audio (Default : ON)
Connections
If you do not want to output the audio through HDMI
(when you digitally output the audio through the
COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack to your audio system,
etc.), you can set the HDMI audio output off.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
• Set to “OFF” when the HDMI sound is not output.
Basic Setup
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Format
HDMI AudioHDMI Audio
RGB Range
ON HDMI CEC
OFF
Disc
Management
Your setting will be activated.
3
RGB Range (Default : Normal)
Recording
You can adjust the RGB range to make the dark areas of
the HDMI images brighter.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
• Select “Enhanced“ if the black-white contrast is not clear.
• This setting is effective only for HDMI RGB output.
General Setting
Format
RGB RangeHDMI Audio
RGB Range
NormalHDMI CEC
Enhanced
Playback
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Your setting will be activated.
Editing
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 97
97
2007/12/18 17:11:32
GENERAL SETTING
Reset All
Reset the setting to default.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
3
Select “Yes” using [K / L] , then press
[ENTER].
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1
2
Press [SETUP] in stop mode and use
[K / L] to select “General Setting”,
then press [ENTER].
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
Use [K / L] to select “Reset All”, then
press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Reset to factory default?
Yes
No
“Are you sure?” will appear. Select “Yes” using
[K / L] and then press [ENTER].
Your setting will be initialized.
ZOOM
SE-R0295
Note
• The settings listed below will remain unchanged
even after resetting to the factory default.
- Clock setting
- OSD language setting
- Parental lock setting
- DivX® VOD code
- V-Chip setting
- Timer programs
98
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 98
2007/12/18 17:11:32
Playback
3) During playback, press [PAUSE F].
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
Press [VCR] first.
Before recording, make sure:
• The appropriate external input position (L1/L2) to which
your external tuner is connected is selected by pressing
[INPUT SELECT ].
• There is a cassette tape with an erase-protection tab in
the unit.
• The desired recording speed is selected in SP (standard
playback) or SLP (super long playback) mode by
pressing [REC MODE].
Recording speed:
Tape speed
6) Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to eject the cassette tape.
Type of tape
T60
T120
T160
SP
1hour
2hours
2-2/3hours
SLP
3hours
6hours
8hours
• Refer to pages 38-41 for instructions on timer recording.
1) Press [REC I] to begin the recording.
To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press
[PAUSE F]. After the unit has been in pause mode for
5 minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the
cassette tape and the video head from damage.
Recording
5) Press [STOP C] to stop playback.
Recording / playback time
Disc
Management
4) Press [PLAY B] to resume playback.
Basic Setup
2) Insert a prerecorded cassette tape. Press [PLAY B]
to begin playback.
Recording
Connections
1) Press [I/y ON/STANDBY] on the remote control or
the front panel of the unit.
When you are playing back a cassette tape, turn on the
TV and be sure to select the input to which the unit is
connected.
Press [VCR].
Introduction
VCR FUNCTIONS
Note
Playback
• When a cassette tape ends during playback, fastforward or normal recording, the unit will
automatically rewind to the beginning of the
cassette tape. After rewinding finishes, the unit will
eject the cassette tape.
• When a cassette tape without erase-protection tab is
inserted, the unit will start playback automatically.
• Tracking will be automatically adjusted upon
playback. To adjust the tracking manually, press
/ ].
[TRACKING
erase-protection tab
Function Setup
Accidental erasure prevention
To prevent accidental recording on a
recorded cassette tape, remove its eraseprotection tab. To record on it later, cover
the hole with cellophane tape.
Editing
2) Press [STOP C] when the recording is completed.
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 99
99
2007/12/18 17:11:33
VCR FUNCTIONS
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)
This feature allows you to set the recording length simply
by pressing [REC I] on the remote control.
Press [VCR] first.
1) During normal recording, press [REC I] to begin
the one-touch timer recording.
You can select a fixed recording time by pressing
[REC I] repeatedly.
(Normal recording)
(8:00)
(0:30)
(1:00)
Index Search
An index mark will be assigned at the beginning of each
recording you make. You may skip to a specific marked
point by following the steps below.
Press [VCR] first.
1) Press [SEARCH] so that “INDEX SEARCH” menu
appears.
2) Using [the Number buttons], enter the number of
recordings you wish to skip within 30 seconds.
(7:30)
INDEX SEARCH
03
When the one-touch timer recording is finished, the
unit will turn off automatically.
To change the recording length during the one-touch
timer recording, press [REC I] repeatedly until the
desired length appear.
To cancel the one-touch timer recording within the
specified time, press [STOP C].
Note
• The remaining recording time will be displayed on
the front panel display during one-touch timer
recording. Press [DISPLAY] to see it on the TV screen.
• You cannot pause the one-touch timer recording.
• If VCR the one-touch timer recording is completed
during DVD playback or recording, the VCR will be in
stop mode and the DVD keeps the current mode.
• Unlike a timer recording, you can perform the
following operations during the one-touch timer
recording.
- Turning off the power (One-touch timer recording
will be canceled.).
- Using [REC I] or [STOP C].
• When the one-touch timer recording is finished and
the power is turned off, the unit will switch to the
standby mode automatically if a timer recording has
been programmed. Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the
standby mode for using the unit continuously.
3) Press [REV E], [FWD D] to start index search.
If you want to go in the forward direction, press
[FWD D].
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press
[REV E].
After index search, the VCR will play back the cassette
tape automatically.
CURRENT PROGRAM
Beginning
of tape
Pro.1
02
Pro.2
01
Pro.3
01
End
of tape
Pro.4
02
Pro.5
03
INDEX MARK
Note
• You can make the index mark up to 20.
100 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 100
2007/12/18 17:11:34
Time Search
Press [VCR] first.
1) Press [SEARCH] repeatedly so that “TIME SEARCH”
menu appears.
TIME SEARCH
2:50
MONO
non Hi-Fi tapes
Monaural
Monaural
Monaural
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded in
Hi-Fi stereo
L
R
L+R
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded main
audio program
Main audio
program
Main audio
program
Main audio
program
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded second
audio program
Second audio
program
Second audio
program
Second audio
program
VCR Function
R-channel
Function Setup
HIFI
L-channel
Editing
Your Selection
Type of recorded tape
Playback
• Index search and time search are not available
during recording.
• Press [STOP C] to stop the search.
• If the end of the cassette tape is reached during
search, this unit will cancel the search and rewind the
cassette tape.
Recording
Note
Fast forward:
When the unit is in stop mode, press [FWD D] to fast
forward the cassette tape.
Rewind:
When the unit is in stop mode, press [REV E] to rewind
the cassette tape.
To cue or review picture during playback (picture search):
Press [REV E], [FWD D] during playback.
Press it again and the unit will search in super high
speed. (in the SLP mode only)
To freeze the picture on TV screen during playback
(still mode):
Press [PAUSE F]. Each time you press the button, the
picture will be forwarded by one frame.
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still
/ ]
mode, stabilize the picture by pressing [TRACKING
on remote control.
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the
vertical hold control on your TV, if equipped.
Counter reset:
Press [CLEAR] to reset the counter to “0:00:00”.
To playback in slow motion:
Press [PAUSE F] during playback, then press [FWD D].
Press [FWD D] or [REV E] repeatedly to select the
desired speed.
Automatic rewind:
When a cassette tape is played back or fast forwarded to
its end, the cassette tape will rewind to the beginning,
stop and eject itself.
To repeat a playback indefinitely without touching
[PLAY B] (Auto Repeat Playback):
During normal playback, press [REPEAT]. When a tape is
played to its end, the tape will rewind to the beginning and
start playback itself. To cancel the Auto Repeat Playback,
press [REPEAT] again.
When you playback a cassette tape recorded in Hi-Fi
stereo:
Press [AUDIO ] on the remote control to select Hi-Fi or
MONO for playback sound mode.
• If you have connected a stereo TV to this unit, select “HIFI”.
• If you have connected a monaural TV to this unit, select
“MONO”.
Disc
Management
3) Press [REV E], [FWD D] to start time search.
If you want to go in the forward direction, press
[FWD D].
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press
[REV E].
After time search, the unit will play back the cassette
tape automatically.
Press [VCR] first.
Basic Setup
2) Using [the Number buttons], enter your desired
time to skip within 30 seconds.
You can set the time up to 9:59.
Other Operations
Connections
This feature allows you to go to a specific point on a
cassette tape by entering the exact amount of time you
wish to skip in order to reach the point.
Introduction
VCR FUNCTIONS
Note
Others
• Still/slow mode will stop after 5 minutes to prevent
damage to the cassette tape and the video head.
• To return to playback from the picture search/still/
slow mode, press [PLAY B].
EN 101
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 101
2007/12/18 17:11:35
TROUBLESHOOTING
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing.
Some simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and restore proper operation.
Symptom
The power does not turn on.
Remedy
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.
• Check the breaker (in case of power failure).
• Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the timer standby mode.
There is no picture.
• Re-connect the connecting cords securely.
• Check if the connecting cords are damaged.
• Check the connection to your TV (page 21).
• Check if the progressive scan mode is set correctly according to your TV
(page 94).
• Switch the input selector on your TV (such as to “L1”) so that the signal
from the unit appears on the TV screen.
Cannot record a TV program.
• This unit does not have a tuner to receive TV broadcasting.
• You must connect this unit to an external tuner to record TV programs
(page 19).
TV program pictures are distorted.
• Check if all the connections are made correctly (page 21).
Playback picture is distorted.
• Keep the device which may cause electrical disturbances, such as a
cellular phone, away.
Playback picture or TV program from • If the playback picture output from a DVD player, VCR or tuner goes
the device connected through the unit through the unit before reaching your TV, the copy-protection signal
is distorted.
applied to some programs could affect picture quality. Disconnect the
playback device in question and connect it directly to your TV.
There is no sound.
• Re-connect all connections securely.
• Check if the connecting cord is damaged.
• Check the connections to the amplifier input.
• Check if the input device setting on the amplifier is correct.
• When the unit is in pause mode or in slow-motion playback mode,
sound is not output. This is not a malfunction.
• When the unit is in fast forward or fast reverse mode, sound is not
output. This is not a malfunction.
• If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(COAXIAL) jack, check the setting in “Audio Out” (page 89).
No DTS sound on digital output.
• Change the setting menu for “DTS” to “ON”.
D
V
D
•
V
C No DTS sound from analog output
R
Nothing was recorded even though
you set the timer setting correctly.
• This unit has no analog sound output when playing back the selected
DTS sound mode.
• There was a power failure during recording.
• The unit’s internal clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for
more than 30 seconds. Reset the clock (page 26).
• The program contains copy protection signals that restricts copying.
• The timer setting overlapped with another setting that has priority.
Timer recording does not start.
• No disc is inserted.
• A disc is not recordable (finalized DVD-RW/-R, finalized DVD+R, a fully
recorded disc, etc.).
Timer recording is not complete or did • The timer setting overlapped with another setting that has priority
not start from the beginning.
(page 41).
• Disc space was not enough.
• “Make Recording Compatible“ is not set to “ON”, when recording onto
DVD+RW/+R that was recorded on other unit.
Timer recording is impossible.
appears on the front panel display of this unit. If not, press
• Make sure
[TIMER SET].
The remote control does not function. • Batteries are weak.
• There are obstacles between the remote control and the unit.
• The remote control is far from the unit.
• There are no batteries in the remote control.
• Check if the unit is turned on.
• The remote control is not pointed at the infrared sensor window on the unit.
• Press [DVD] or [VCR], whichever you need. Then, try again.
• Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the timer standby mode.
The unit does not operate properly.
• When static electricity, etc., causes the unit to operate abnormally,
unplug the unit and then plug it in again.
102 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 102
2007/12/18 17:11:36
Symptom
DV signal cannot be input.
Picture noise appears.
Playback picture from the external
devices connected to this unit is
distorted.
There is no sound.
Sound is noisy.
The disc does not play back.
D
V
D
Playback image freezes for a second.
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the
operations. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the disc.
• The title does not have the multilingual audio tracks.
• The DVD-video prohibits the changing of the language for the sound
track.
Others
The unit starts playing back the disc
automatically.
Some functions such as stop, search,
or slow-motion playback cannot be
performed.
The language for the sound track
cannot be changed.
VCR Function
Discs recorded on this unit cannot be
played back on other DVD players.
The disc does not start playback from
the beginning.
Function Setup
• If the setup menu appears on the TV screen, press [RETURN] to exit.
• Check if the progressive scan mode is set correctly according to your TV
(page 94).
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
• If the picture output signal from the external devices passes through this
unit to get to your TV, the copy protection signal applied to some DVD could
affect the picture quality. Disconnect the playback device in question and
connect it directly to your TV.
• If you are using DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT (COAXIAL) jack, check the setting
in “Audio Out” (page 24).
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
• No disc is inserted.
• A blank disc is inserted.
• The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.
• The disc is not correctly inserted.
• The unit cannot play back certain discs (such as a CD-ROM) (page 10).
• The region code on the DVD-video does not match the unit (page 10).
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and leave the
unit turned on for about 2 hours until the moisture evaporates (page 4).
• If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the unit cannot play back
the disc if it was not finalized.
• During the playback of 2 layered disc, picture may freeze for a moment
when the 1st layer switches to the 2nd layer. This is not a malfunction.
• If you are using DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R, please ensure you finalized the
disc after recording (pages 30-32).
• Resume playback was activated (page 58). Press [STOP C] twice.
• You have inserted a disc whose title menu or DVD menu automatically
appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted.
• The DVD-video features an auto playback function.
Editing
There is no picture.
Playback
• For recording with the DVC, the recording audio signal can be set to 12
bits or 16 bits. However, when 16-bit recording mode is selected, audio
signal cannot be switched. To record an audio signal, set it to 12 bits.
Recording
DV audio signal cannot be switched.
Disc
Management
• Some functions may not operate depending on the type of DVC. For
example, if the DVC does not support slow playback mode, the slow
playback function is disabled.
• With L3 (DV), the disc display menu does not appear unless disc
playback is executed.
Basic Setup
• Signal input or DVC operation from this unit may be disabled
depending on the type of DVC.
• If a DVC signal cannot be input, use an external input (L1/L2) for analog
connection via audio/video cables.
• DVC control may be disabled depending on the type of DVC, even in a
mode other than camera mode. In this case, switch to DVD control and
execute the normal recording procedure while operating the DVC.
Connections
D
The DVC cannot be operated with this
V unit.
D
•
V
C
R Certain functions of the unit cannot
operate.
Remedy
• Before connection, turn on the power supplies for both this unit and the
DVC, and make sure that these units are in stop mode.
• Only a “DVC-SD” signal can be input from the DVC to this unit. Other
types of signals are not supported.
• Do not connect any device other than the DVC. Even if a recorder or PC
with another DV terminal is connected, the DV function will not operate.
• If the DVC is not recognized after connection, turn off the power supply
for the unit and re-connect the DVC.
Introduction
TROUBLESHOOTING
EN 103
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 103
2007/12/18 17:11:36
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
The subtitle language cannot be
changed or turned off.
The angles cannot be changed.
Recording does not stop immediately
after you press [STOP C].
The disc tray does not open when you
press [OPEN/CLOSE A].
“Repairing” appears on the TV screen.
Repairing
D
V
D
88%
In a case you intend to cancel the
repairing process.
Do you want to cancel a repairing
process ? When selecting “Yes”,
the disc may not be usable.
Remedy
• Multilingual subtitle are not recorded on the DVD-video.
• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD-video being played back.
• The angle-change operation is whenever possible as long as the disc
contains a multi-angle portion. Actual change will be performed when
the portion has come up.
• The DVD-video prohibits changing angles.
• Try changing the angle using the DVD-video’s menu.
• It may take a few seconds for the unit to input disc data before
recording stops.
• It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you have
recorded or edited a disc. This is because the unit is adding disc data to
the disc.
• If there is a power failure or unplugging during recording, finalizing,
formatting or editing (even after “Repairing” disappears), a repairing
process will begin automatically just after turning the unit on again.
It may take several minutes up to about several hours.
• If you intend to cancel the repairing process, press [A OPEN/CLOSE]
on the front panel, then select “Yes” and press [ENTER]. After that, press
[OPEN/CLOSE A] to take out the disc. The disc canceled during the
repairing process MAY NOT work.
Yes
No
Repairing
88%
No image from HDMI connection.
• Check the HDMI connection. (Check the status of the HDMI related
indications.)
• Check whether the connected monitor device or other device supports
HDCP. (This unit will not output a video signal unless the other device
supports HDCP.)
• Check the setting of HDMI.
• Check whether the output format of this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches
the supported input format of other connected device.
• If the unit is connected to the unauthorized display device with an
HDMI cable, the audio/video signal may not be output when playing
back a commercial DVD-video.
There is no sound or the sound is
distorted.
• The HDMI sound is not output when “HDMI Audio” is set to “OFF”.
• Check the RCA audio cable connection. If you are using HDMI-DVI
conversion cable, you must connect the RCA audio cable, too.
• Check whether the output format of this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches
the supported input format of other connected device.
There is no picture.
• If you connect the cable to S-VIDEO OUT/ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT /
HDMI OUT jack, try connecting it to AUDIO / VIDEO OUT jack instead.
Picture noise appears.
• Head cleaning for VCR may be necessary. Refer to “Auto Head Cleaning”
(page 5).
• Adjust tracking control for better picture by pressing [TRACKING
/ ]
while you are playing back a cassette tape.
V
C The cassette tape does not play back. • No cassette tape is inserted.
• Make sure the cassette tape has an erase-protection tab when you
R The tape ejected after you press
[REC I].
record to a cassette tape. If needed, cover the hole with cellophane
tape.
The remote control does not function. • Check if a cassette tape is in this unit.
The motor rotates even when
• The motor may rotate for the duration of approximately 5 minutes for
efficient operation. This is not a malfunction.
playback / recording is stopped.
104 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 104
2007/12/18 17:11:36
Error message
Cause
Solution
• Unplayable disc is inserted in the unit.
• The disc is upside down.
• Playback is not authorized in the region
of the DVD-video which you inserted in
the unit.
• The current selected parental level
prohibits playback.
• Insert the standardized disc which have
the marks on pages 9-10.
• Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.
• Insert the DVD-video with region codes
1 or ALL.
• Check “Parental Lock” setting in
“Playback” menu (page 88).
• You are trying to record onto the protected
disc which is set in “DVD Menu” menu.
• You are trying to record onto the disc
which has no space for recording.
• Release the disc protect setting in “DVD
Menu” menu (page 29).
• Insert the recordable disc with enough
recording space.
• You are trying to record onto the DVDRW/-R on which the number of recording
titles comes up to the maximum (99).
• You are trying to record onto the VR mode
DVD-RW on which the number of recording
chapters comes up to the maximum (999).
• You are trying to record onto the DVD+RW/
+R on which the number of recording titles
comes up to the maximum (49).
• Delete unnecessary titles (page 72).
Recording Error
You cannot record more than 254 chapters on one disc.
(The maximum is 254)
• You are trying to record onto the DVD+RW
on which the number of recording
chapters comes up to the maximum (254).
• Delete unnecessary chapter marks
(page 77).
Recording Error
You cannot record on this disc as Control
Information is full.
• This disc has no space to write the Control
Information when recording or deleting contents.
When editing has been repeatedly performed,
the control Information area may come up to be
full even the recording area has enough space.
• When recordings are performed
repeatedly onto an unstable disc, this
area may come up to be full.
• Every time you insert a disc for recording,
the disc’s working area will be taken up.
And if you repeat this frequently, it will
be used up sooner and you may not be
able to record full 49 titles.
• You are trying to record onto the disc
already finalized.
• You are trying to record onto the
unfinalized +VR mode discs recorded
on other unit.
• Delete unnecessary titles
(page 72).
• Delete unnecessary titles (page 72).
Editing
• Insert a new disc.
• Undo the finalizing for this disc
(page 32).
• Set “Make Recording Compatible” to
“ON” to rewrite the menu, after that you
will record to disc (page 34).
Frequently Asked Questions
No, this unit records only DVD.
Possible when the region code of the disc is 1 and All.
No, you cannot control the unit by PC.
Yes, you can. Select “L1” or “L2” as your recording channel,
and leave the cable/satellite box on (pages 20, 38-41).
Others
– Can I record to CD-RW/-R?
– Can I play back DVD-video that is bought in another country?
– Can I connect the unit to my PC?
– Can I program a timer recording with cable/satellite box?
VCR Function
* If you are still having trouble with the unit after checking “TROUBLESHOOTING”, write down the error code and the
error description for calling our help line to locate an Authorized Service Center.
Function Setup
Recording Error
This disc is already finalized.
Recording Error
The disc has no recording compatibility.
Set “Make Recording Compatible” to
“ON” to convert the disc.
• Delete unnecessary chapter marks
(page 77).
Playback
Recording Error
You cannot record on this disc as Power
Calibration Area is full.
Recording
Recording Error
This disc is protected and not recordable.
Recording Error
Disc is full.
(No area for new recording)
Recording Error
You cannot record more than 99 titles on one disc.
(The maximum is 99)
Recording Error
You cannot record more than 999 chapters on one disc.
(The maximum is 999)
Recording Error
You cannot record more than 49 titles on one disc.
(The maximum is 49)
Recording Error
This program is not allowed to be
recorded on this disc.
• Insert the DVD-RW disc in VR mode
(ver.1.1 or 1.2 compatible with CPRM).
• Insert the recordable disc, and ensure
the disc status satisfies the recording
requirements (page 9).
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
• Replace the disc.
• Insert the DVD-RW disc in VR mode
(ver.1.1 or 1.2 compatible with CPRM).
Disc
Management
• You cannot record copy prohibited
programs.
• Set “Format Mode” to “VR mode”
(pages 27-28).
Basic Setup
• You are trying to record the copy
prohibited program.
• You are trying to record the copy-once
program onto the DVD-RW disc in
Video mode.
• You are trying to record the copy-once
program.
• You are trying to record onto the disc
which is unrecordable, or the disc status
is unable to record.
• The disc is dirty.
• The disc is damaged.
• You are trying to record the copy-once
program onto the DVD-RW disc which
is not compatible with CPRM.
Connections
Disc Error
— Please eject the disc. —
Playback feature may not be available on this disc.
Region Error
— Please eject the disc. —
Playback is not authorized in your region.
Parental Lock On
The current selected parental level
prohibits playback.
Recording Error
This program is not allowed to be recorded.
Recording Error
This program is not recordable in Video
mode.
Recording Error
This program is not recordable in +VR mode.
Recording Error
Cannot record on this disc.
Introduction
TROUBLESHOOTING
EN 105
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 105
2007/12/18 17:11:37
LANGUAGE CODE
Language
Abkhazian
Afar
Afrikaans
Albanian
Amharic
Arabic
Armenian
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Basque
Bengali;Bangla
Bhutani
Bihari
Bislama
Breton
Bulgarian
Burmese
Byelorussian
Cambodian
Catalan
Chinese
Corsican
Croatian
Czech
Danish
Dutch
English
Esperanto
Estonian
Faroese
Fiji
Finnish
French
Frisian
Galician
Georgian
German
Greek
Greenlandic
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hebrew
Hindi
Code
4748
4747
4752
6563
4759
4764
5471
4765
4771
4772
4847
5167
4860
5072
4854
4855
4864
4853
5971
4851
5759
4947
7254
4961
5464
4965
5047
6058
5160
5161
5166
5261
5256
5255
5264
5271
5358
5747
5051
5158
5758
5360
5367
5447
5569
5455
Language
Hungarian
Icelandic
Indonesian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Irish
Italian
Japanese
Javanese
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kazakh
Kinyarwanda
Kirghiz
Kirundi
Korean
Kurdish
Laothian
Latin
Latvian; Lettish
Lingala
Lithuanian
Macedonian
Malagasy
Malay
Malayalam
Maltese
Maori
Marathi
Moldavian
Mongolian
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Occitan
Oriya
Oromo (Afan)
Panjabi
Pashto; Pushto
Persian
Polish
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Romanian
Code
5467
5565
5560
5547
5551
5557
5347
5566
5647
5669
5760
5765
5757
6469
5771
6460
5761
5767
5861
5847
5868
5860
5866
5957
5953
5965
5958
5966
5955
5964
5961
5960
6047
6051
6061
6149
6164
6159
6247
6265
5247
6258
6266
6367
6459
6461
Language
Russian
Samoan
Sangho
Sanskrit
Scots Gaelic
Serbian
Serbo-Croatian
Sesotho
Setswana
Shona
Sindhi
Singhalese
Siswat
Slovak
Slovenian
Somali
Spanish
Sundanese
Swahili
Swedish
Tagalog
Tajik
Tamil
Tatar
Telugu
Thai
Tibetan
Tigrinya
Tonga
Tsonga
Turkish
Turkmen
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Welsh
Wolof
Xhosa
Yiddish
Yoruba
Zulu
Code
6467
6559
6553
6547
5350
6564
6554
6566
6660
6560
6550
6555
6565
6557
6558
6561
5165
6567
6569
6568
6658
6653
6647
6666
6651
6654
4861
6655
6661
6665
6664
6657
6669
6757
6764
6772
6855
6861
4971
6961
7054
5655
7161
7267
106 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 106
2007/12/18 17:11:37
PCM (pulse code modulation)
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also
“Digital Audio”.
The most common system of encoding digital audio,
found on CD and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amplifiers with
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and
MPEG audio to PCM. See also “Digital Audio”.
Aspect Ratio
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the TV screen
is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the TV
screen is almost twice as wide as it is high).
Chapter
Component Video Output
A type of display that does not split each frame into
fields, and instead scans directly through all the scanlines
of each frame in order. Progressive scan provides less
flickering and higher image resolution than traditional
(480i) TV signals. Refer to page 94 for instructions on
selective progressive scan mode.
Region Code
Digital Audio
Sampling Frequency
DivX®
DivX® is a codec (compression/decompression) that can
compress images to a very small amount of data.
The rate which sound is measured by a specified interval
to turn into digital audio data. The numbers of sampling
in one second defines as sampling frequency. The higher
the rate, the better the sound quality.
S-Video Output
It delivers independently each signal of color(C) and
luminance(Y) to TV as video signals, so that higher-quality
picture will be gained.
Title (DVD only)
The system to compress digital sound developed by
Dolby Laboratories. It offers you sound of stereo(2ch) or
multi channel audio.
Track
DTS® (Digital Theater System)
Video mode
DTS is a multi channel surround sound system. By
connecting to DTS decoder you can enjoy dynamic and
realistic sound like movie theatre. DTS surround sound
technologies were developed by DTS, Inc.
Video mode is the same recording format as used on
the DVD videos you purchase in local shops. You can
play back the discs recorded in this format in most DVD
players, however it offers only limited editing. You will
need to finalize discs recorded in video mode before
playing them back on other unit.
To make DVD, which have been recorded on, possible to
play back in DVD players.
A digital interface between audio and video source. It can
transmit component video, audio, and control signal with
one cable connection.
JPEG (joint photographic experts group)
VR mode
A basic recording format for DVD-RW. VR mode offers
advanced editing, however it is playable only on VR
mode compatible unit. Finalization is recommended
before playing them back on other unit.
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio)
WMA is the audio compressing technology developed by
Microsoft. You can copy WMA files on CD-RW/-R from a
computer and play them back on this unit.
MP3 (MPEG audio layer 3)
+VR mode
MP3 is a method of compressing files. You can copy MP3
files on CD-RW/-R from the computer and play back the
files on this unit.
A recording format for DVD+RW/+R. +VR mode offers basic
editing, and it is playable on most DVD players. Finalization
is recommended before playing them back on other unit.
VCR Function
JPEG is a method of compressing still image files. You can
copy JPEG files on CD-RW/-R from a computer and play
back the files on this unit.
Function Setup
HDMI™ (high definition multimedia interface)
Audio CD use tracks to divide up the content of a disc.
The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also “Chapter”.
Editing
A collection of chapters on DVD. See also “Chapter”.
Playback
Dolby® Digital
Finalize
Recording
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analogto-digital converter, generating a stream of numbers.
On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates
an analog signal based on these numbers. See also
“Sampling Frequency” and “Analog Audio”.
Regions associate discs and players with particular areas
of the world. This unit will only play back discs that have
compatible region codes. You can find the region code
of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).
Disc
Management
Each signal of luminance (Y) and component (PB/CB, PR/
CR) is independent to output so that you can experience
picture color as it is.
Also, due to compatibility with progressive video (480p),
you can experience higher-density picture than that in
interlace (480i).
Basic Setup
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on a
DVD is usually divided into chapters. See also “Title”.
Progressive Scan (480p)
Connections
Analog Audio
Introduction
GLOSSARY
Others
EN 107
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 107
2007/12/18 17:11:37
SPECIFICATIONS
• This model complies with the below specifications.
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.
General
System
VCR video heads
Power requirements
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (width x height x depth)
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
TV format
Recording
Recording format
Recording discs
Video recording format
Sampling frequency
Compression format
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency
Compression format
Input / Output
Video input
Input level
Jacks
Video output
Output level
Jack
S-video input
Y (luminance) - Input level
C (color) - Input level
Jacks
S-video output
Y (luminance) - Output level
C (color) - Output level
Jack
Component video output
Output level
Jacks
HDMI output
Jack
Audio input
During audio input
Jacks
Audio output
During audio output
Jacks
Digital audio output
Output level
Jack
DV input
Jack
DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R, DVD-video, CD-DA, CD-RW/-R,
VHS cassette tape
Four heads
AC120 V, 60 Hz
30 W (standby: 3.3 W)
9.5 lbs ( 4.3 kg )
17.2” x 4.0” x 10.6” (435 x 99.5 x 268 mm)
41 °F to 104 °F (5 °C to 40 °C)
Less than 80% (no condensation)
NTSC TV standard
VR (video recording) format
Video format
+VR format
DVD-Rewritable/-Recordable, DVD+Rewritable/+Recordable
13.5 MHz
MPEG
48 kHz
Dolby Digital/LPCM (XP Recording mode only)
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
Output 1 (rear)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
Input 1 (rear)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
286 mVp-p (75Ω)
4 pin mini DIN
Output 1 (rear)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
286 mVp-p (75Ω)
4 pin mini DIN
Output 1 (rear)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75Ω), PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jacks
HDMI jack
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
2 V rms (input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
RCA jacks
Output 1 L/R (rear)
2 V rms (output impedance: less than 1 kΩ)
RCA jacks
Output 1 (rear) COAXIAL
500 mVp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
IEEE 1394
DV input jack (4 pin)
108 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 108
2007/12/18 17:11:38
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the United States.
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DAV PRODUCT
AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
DAV PRODUCTS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED
IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration Card
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DAV Product.
Your Responsibility
(1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide other proof of purchase.
(2) All warranty servicing of this DAV Product must be made pursuant
to the TACP DAV Product Warranty Exchange Program.
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.
The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any
obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law
of the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90)
days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect.
This limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under state law.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW
LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN
AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer
controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered
by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna
systems are your responsibility.
VCR Function
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as
limited above, and do not extend to any DAV Product or parts that
have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DAV Product
or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as
lightning or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation,
improper maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by
TACP; use or malfunction through simultaneous use of this DAV Product
and connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had
the serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.
Function Setup
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if the DAV Product is
purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.
S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXPRESSLY
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET
FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY WARRANTIES
IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY
LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND
SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE REPAIR
OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE
LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY
USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DAV PRODUCT).
Editing
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
For additional information, visit TACP’s website: www.tacp.toshiba.com
Playback
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your
DAV Product on-line at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as possible.
By registering your DAV Product you will enable TACP to bring you new
products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact
you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the U.S.
Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to complete and return the product
registration card does not diminish your warranty rights.
(2) You must include the original bill of sale (or a copy of the original bill
of sale) or other proof of purchase along with the entire DAV Product
when sending the DAV Product to the TACP Warranty Exchange Center
specified by TACP’s Consumer Solutions Center. You are responsible
for all inbound transportation and insurance charges for the DAV Product
to the TACP Warranty Exchange Center.
Recording
Commercial Units
DAV Products sold and used for commercial purposes have a limited
warranty for all parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date of
original retail purchase and ends on the date that is ninety (90) days
thereafter.
(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty service for your DAV Product
under the TACP DAV Product Warranty Exchange Program, contact
TACP’s Consumer Solutions Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.
Disc
Management
Rental Units
The warranty for DAV Product rental units begins on the date of the first
rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,
whichever comes first.
How to Obtain Warranty Services
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking
the section “TROUBLESHOOTING,” you find that service is needed:
Basic Setup
Limited Warranty
TACP warrants this DAV Product and its parts against defects in materials
or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original
retail purchase.
DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE DAV
PRODUCT WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED DAV PRODUCT WITHOUT
CHARGE TO YOU. DURING THE PERIOD THAT COMMENCES ON THE
DATE THAT IS NINETY ONE (91) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL
RETAIL PURCHASE AND ENDS ON THE DATE THAT IS THREE HUNDRED
SIXTY FIVE (365) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL
PURCHASE, TACP WILL EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE DAV PRODUCT
WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED DAV PRODUCT FOR A FEE.
Connections
DAV PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA
AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Introduction
LIMITED WARRANTY
Limited United States Warranty
Digital Audio Video (“DAV”) Product - Exchange Warranty
Others
EN 109
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 109
2007/12/18 17:11:38
LIMITED WARRANTY
/LPLWHG&DQDGLDQ:DUUDQW\
)RU7RVKLED%UDQG'LJLWDO$XGLR9LGHR3URGXFWV
7RVKLEDRI&DQDGD/LPLWHG7&/PDNHVWKHIROORZLQJOLPLWHGZDUUDQWLHVWRRULJLQDOFRQVXPHUVLQ&DQDGD7+(6(/,0,7('
:$55$17,(6(;7(1'727+(25,*,1$/&21680(5385&+$6(525$1<3(56215(&(,9,1*7+,6726+,%$%5$1'
',*,7$/$8',29,'(2352'8&7WKH'$9352'8&76RU'$93URGXFWV$6$*,)7)5207+(25,*,1$/&21680(5
385&+$6(5$1'721227+(5385&+$6(52575$16)(5((
'$9352'8&76385&+$6(',1&$1$'$$1'86('$1<:+(5(2876,'(2)&$1$'$,1&/8',1*:,7+287/,0,7$7,21
7+(81,7('67$7(6$1'0(;,&2$5(127&29(5('%<7+(6(:$55$17,(6
'$9352'8&76385&+$6('$1<:+(5(2876,'(2)&$1$'$,1&/8',1*:,7+287/,0,7$7,217+(81,7('67$7(6
$1'0(;,&2$1'86(',1&$1$'$$5(127&29(5('%<7+(6(:$55$17,(6
/LPLWHG2QH<HDU:DUUDQW\RQ3DUWVDQG/DERXU
6XEMHFWWRWKHPRUHOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\LIWKH'$93URGXFWLVXVHGIRU
DQ\FRPPHUFLDORUEXVLQHVVSXUSRVHVDVVHWRXWEHORZ7&/
ZDUUDQWVWKH'$93URGXFWDQGLWVSDUWVDJDLQVWPDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQ
PDWHULDOVRUZRUNPDQVKLSWKDWUHVXOWLQWKH'$93URGXFWIDLOLQJIRU
DSHULRGRIRQH\HDUDIWHUWKHGDWHRIRULJLQDOUHWDLOSXUFKDVH
'85,1*7+,63(5,2'7&/:,//$77&/·6237,215(3$,5
255(3/$&($'()(&7,9(3$57:,7+$1(:25
5()85%,6+('3$57:,7+287&+$5*(72<28)25
3$57625/$%285<280867'(/,9(57+((17,5('$9
352'8&772$7&/'$9352'8&7$87+25,=('6(59,&(
3529,'(5$63<2808673$<)25$//
75$163257$7,21$1',1685$1&(&+$5*(6)257+(
'$9352'8&772$1')5207+($63
5HQWDO8QLWV
7KHZDUUDQW\IRU'$93URGXFWUHQWDOXQLWVEHJLQVZLWKWKHGDWHRI
ILUVWUHQWDORUWKLUW\GD\VIURPWKHGDWHRIVKLSPHQWWRWKHUHQWDO
ILUPZKLFKHYHUFRPHVILUVW
/LPLWHG:DUUDQW\IRU&RPPHUFLDO8QLWV
7&/ZDUUDQWV'$93URGXFWVWKDWDUHXVHGIRUDQ\FRPPHUFLDORU
EXVLQHVVSXUSRVHVDVIROORZVDOOSDUWVDUHZDUUDQWHGDJDLQVW
PDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQPDWHULDOVRUZRUNPDQVKLSWKDWUHVXOWLQWKH'$9
3URGXFWIDLOLQJIRUDSHULRGRIQLQHW\GD\VDIWHUWKHGDWHRI
RULJLQDOUHWDLOSXUFKDVH'85,1*7+,63(5,2'7&/:,//
$77&/·6237,215(3$,5255(3/$&($'()(&7,9(3$57
:,7+$1(:255()85%,6+('3$57:,7+287&+$5*(
72<28)253$57625/$%285<280867'(/,9(57+(
(17,5('$9352'8&772$1$63<2808673$<)25$//
75$163257$7,21$1',1685$1&(&+$5*(6)257+(
'$9352'8&772$1')5207+($63
<RXU5HVSRQVLELOLW\
7+($%29(:$55$17,(6$5(68%-(&7727+(
)2//2:,1*&21',7,216
<RXPXVWSURYLGH\RXUELOORIVDOHRURWKHUSURRIRISXUFKDVH
$OOZDUUDQW\VHUYLFLQJRIWKLV'$93URGXFWPXVWEHSHUIRUPHG
E\DQ$63
7KHZDUUDQWLHVIURP7&/DUHHIIHFWLYHRQO\LIWKH'$93URGXFW
LVLSXUFKDVHGDVQHZDQGXQRSHQHGIURP7&/RUIURP7&/·V
DXWKRUL]HGGLVWULEXWRUVGHDOHUVRUUHVHOOHUV$'5·VDQGLL
ORFDWHGRSHUDWHGLQ&DQDGD
:DUUDQWLHVH[WHQGRQO\WRPDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQPDWHULDOVRU
ZRUNPDQVKLSDVOLPLWHGDERYHDQGGRQRWH[WHQGWR
D 6HUYLFHUHSDLUVRUUHSODFHPHQWPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\DFFLGHQW
PLVXVHDEXVHPRLVWXUHOLTXLGVGXVWGLUWQHJOHFWDFFLGHQW
GDPDJHDSSOLFDWLRQVLPSURSHULQVWDOODWLRQLPSURSHU
RSHUDWLRQLPSURSHUFOHDQLQJLPSURSHUPDLQWHQDQFHQRUPDO
ZHDUDQGWHDURUDQ\RWKHUH[WHUQDOFDXVHRUHYHQWDFWRU
RPLVVLRQRXWVLGHWKHFRQWURORI7&/LQFOXGLQJILUHWKHIWDFWV
RI*RGDOWHUDWLRQSRZHUIDLOXUHVSRZHUVXUJHVRUSRZHU
VKRUWDJHVOLJKWQLQJRWKHUHOHFWULFDOIDXOWVRUUHSDLUV
PRGLILFDWLRQVRUUHSODFHPHQWVE\SHUVRQVRWKHUWKDQWKRVH
DXWKRUL]HGE\7&/WRVHUYLFHWKH'$93URGXFW
E 5HSODFHPHQWRIPLVVLQJGLVFDUGHGRUORVWSDUWVWKH
SURYLVLRQRIUHWURILWVRUSUHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH
F 5HSDLURIGDPDJHWKDWLVFRVPHWLFRQO\RUGRHVQRWDIIHFW
WKH'$93URGXFWIXQFWLRQDOLW\VXFKDVZHDUDQGWHDU
VFUDWFKHVDQGGHQWV
G 6HUYLFHRQ7RVKLEDEUDQGHGDFFHVVRU\LWHPVVXFK
DFFHVVRU\LWHPVPD\EHFRYHUHGE\WKHLURZQZDUUDQW\
H 6HUYLFHRQWKLUGSDUW\SURGXFWVRUVHUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\
E\XVHRILQFRPSDWLEOHWKLUGSDUW\SURGXFWV
I 6HUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\WKHVLPXOWDQHRXVXVHRIWKLV
'$93URGXFWDQGFRQQHFWHGHTXLSPHQW
J 0RGLILFDWLRQVWRWKH'$93URGXFWQRWDSSURYHGLQZULWLQJ
E\7&/DQGVHUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\WKHXVHRU
LQVWDOODWLRQRIQRQ7RVKLEDPRGLILFDWLRQVWRWKH'$9
3URGXFW
K 6HUYLFHRID'$93URGXFWRQZKLFKWKH726+,%$ODEHORU
ORJRUDWLQJODEHORUVHULDOQXPEHUKDYHEHHQGHIDFHGRU
UHPRYHG
L 2QVLWHVHUYLFHDQGUHSDLURIWKH'$93URGXFW
M 'DPDJHWRWKH'$93URGXFWFDXVHGE\IDLOXUHWRIROORZ
WKHVSHFLILFDWLRQV8VHUPDQXDOVRUJXLGHVDVWRXVDJH
DQGRUVWRUDJH
'LVFODLPHUDQG/LPLWDWLRQRI5HPHG\
727+((;7(1712735(&/8'('%</$:$//27+(5
(;35(66$1',03/,(':$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'
5(35(6(17$7,216)257+,6'$9352'8&7,1&/8',1*
7+(,03/,(':$55$17,(6$1'&21',7,2162)
0(5&+$17$%,/,7<$1'),71(66)25$3$57,&8/$5
385326($5(+(5(%<',6&/$,0('$1'(;&/8'('
,)7+($33/,&$%/(/$:67$78725<2527+(5:,6(
35(&/8'(67+((;&/86,212)$1<,03/,('
:$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'5(35(6(17$7,216
7+(168&+,03/,(':$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'
5(35(6(17$7,216$5(27+(5:,6(/,0,7(',1
'85$7,21727+(7(502)7+,6(;35(66:5,77(1
/,0,7(':$55$17<727+((;7(1712735(&/8'('
%</$:67$78725<2527+(5:,6(7+,6:5,77(1
:$55$17<683(5&('(6$1'63(&,),&$//<',6&/$,06
$1<27+(5:$55$17<&21',7,21255(35(6(17$7,21
12767$7(',17+,6:$55$17<:+(7+(50$'(%<
7&/726+,%$&25325$7,217+(,5$)),/,$7(6$'5V
$1'$63V$1':+(7+(50$'(25$//<25,1:5,7,1*
,1&/8',1*$1<67$7(0(17,1$1<%52&+85(35(66
5(/($6($11281&(0(17$'9(57,6(0(1732,172)
6$/(',63/$<(7&
<2808675($'$1')2//2:$//6(783$1'86$*(
,16758&7,216,17+($33/,&$%/(86(5*8,'(6$1'25
0$18$/6,)<28)$,/72'2627+,6'$9352'8&70$<
127)81&7,213523(5/<$1'<280$<68))(5'$0$*(
7+,6:$55$17<:,//127&29(5$1<6(59,&(7+$7,6
5(48,5(',13$5725,1:+2/($6$5(68/72)$1<
)$,/85(72)2//2:7+(6(783$1'86$*(
,16758&7,2167+,6:$55$17<'2(6127$33/<$1'
6+$//%(92,'$1'81(1)25&($%/(,)7+('$9
352'8&7,623(1('6(59,&('255(3$,5('%<
3(5621627+(57+$17+26($87+25,=('%<7&/72
6(59,&(255(3$,57+('$9352'8&7
110 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 110
2007/12/18 17:11:38
7RWKHH[WHQWSHUPLWWHGE\ODZWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\VKDOOEH
JRYHUQHGDQGFRQVWUXHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHODZVRI2QWDULR
+RZWR2EWDLQ:DUUDQW\6HUYLFHV
,IDIWHUIROORZLQJDOORIWKHRSHUDWLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVLQWKLVPDQXDO
DQGFKHFNLQJWKH7URXEOHVKRRWLQJVHFWLRQ\RXILQGWKDW
VHUYLFHLVQHHGHG
Recording
7RILQGWKHQHDUHVW$63YLVLW7&/·VZHEVLWHDW
ZZZWRVKLEDFDRUFDOOWROOIUHH
3UHVHQW\RXUELOORIVDOHRURWKHUSURRIRISXUFKDVHWRWKH
$63
)RUDGGLWLRQDOLQIRUPDWLRQYLVLW7&/
VZHEVLWHDWZZZWRVKLEDFD
Disc
Management
,IWKHUHLVDQ\LQFRQVLVWHQF\EHWZHHQWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\RQ
WKHRQHKDQGDQGDQ\VWDWHPHQWLQWKHSDFNDJLQJRIWKH'$9
3URGXFWRULQDQ\RWKHUGRFXPHQWHQFORVHGZLWKRUXVHGLQWKH
FRQWH[WRIWKHSURPRWLRQRUVDOHRIWKH'$93URGXFWRQWKH
RWKHUKDQGWKHSURYLVLRQVRIWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\VKDOOSUHYDLO
Basic Setup
Playback
Editing
$UELWUDWLRQDQG'LVSXWH5HVROXWLRQ
7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\ODZDQ\FODLPGLVSXWH
FRQWURYHUV\RUGLVDJUHHPHQWZKHWKHUIRUEUHDFKRIZDUUDQW\
EUHDFKRIFRQWUDFWWRUWLQFOXGLQJQHJOLJHQFHXQGHUDVWDWXWH
RUXQGHUDQ\RWKHUODZRUIRUPRIDFWLRQDJDLQVWDQ\RIWKH
5HODWHG3DUWLHVDULVLQJRXWRIRURWKHUZLVHUHODWLQJWRLWKLV
ZDUUDQW\LLWKH'$93URGXFWLLLDQ\RUDORUZULWWHQUHSUHVHQWDWLRQV
VWDWHPHQWVEURFKXUHVSUHVVUHOHDVHVDGYHUWLVLQJDQQRXQFHPHQW
SRLQWRIVDOHGLVSOD\RUSURPRWLRQDOPDWHULDOUHODWLQJWRWKH'$9
3URGXFWLYWKHUHODWLRQVKLSVWKDWUHVXOWIURPWKLVZDUUDQW\WKH
IRUHJRLQJFODLPVGLVSXWHVFRQWURYHUVLHVDQGGLVDJUHHPHQWVDUH
FROOHFWLYHO\UHIHUUHGWRDVWKH'LVSXWHVKDOOEHUHIHUUHGWRDQG
UHVROYHGE\ILQDODQGELQGLQJDUELWUDWLRQWRWKHH[FOXVLRQRIWKH
FRXUWV7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\ODZ\RXDJUHHWRZDLYHDQ\
ULJKWWKDW\RXPD\KDYHWRFRPPHQFHRUSDUWLFLSDWHLQDQ\
UHSUHVHQWDWLYHRUFODVVSURFHHGLQJDJDLQVWWKH5HODWHG3DUWLHV
UHODWLQJWRDQ\'LVSXWH,IDQGZKHUHDSSOLFDEOHDQGWRWKHH[WHQWQRW
SUHFOXGHGE\ODZ\RXIXUWKHUDJUHHWRRSWRXWRIDQ\VXFK
UHSUHVHQWDWLYHRUFODVVSURFHHGLQJV$UELWUDWLRQRIDQ\'LVSXWHZLOO
EHFRQGXFWHGLQWKHIRUXPDQGLQWKHPDQQHUDVDJUHHGWREHWZHHQ
\RXDQG7&/)DLOLQJVXFKDJUHHPHQWWKHDUELWUDWLRQZLOOEH
FRQGXFWHGE\RQHDUELWUDWRUSXUVXDQWWRWKHODZVDQGUXOHVUHODWLQJ
WRDUELWUDWLRQJHQHUDOO\LQIRUFHLQWKHMXULVGLFWLRQLQZKLFK\RXUHVLGH
DWWKHWLPHWKDWWKH'LVSXWHDULVHV7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\
ODZQRFODLPGLVSXWHFRQWURYHUV\RUGLVDJUHHPHQWRIDQ\RWKHU
SHUVRQPD\EHMRLQHGRUFRPELQHGZLWKDQ\'LVSXWHE\\RXZLWKRXW
WKHSULRUZULWWHQFRQVHQWRI7&/
*HQHUDO3URYLVLRQV
,IDQGWRWKHH[WHQWWKDWDQ\SURYLVLRQRIWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\
VKRXOGJHQHUDOO\EHIRXQGWREHXQHQIRUFHDEOHWKH
XQHQIRUFHDEOHSURYLVLRQVKDOOEHVHYHUHGIURPWKHZDUUDQW\
DQGGHHPHGQRWWRIRUPSDUWRIWKHZDUUDQW\7KHUHPDLQLQJ
SURYLVLRQVRIWKLVZDUUDQW\VKDOOEHDQGUHPDLQYDOLGDQG
HQIRUFHDEOH,IDQGWRWKHH[WHQWWKDWDQ\SURYLVLRQRIWKLV
OLPLWHGZDUUDQW\DVLWUHODWHVWRDQ\RIWKH5HODWHG3DUWLHVLV
IRXQGWREHLQYDOLGRUXQHQIRUFHDEOHLQUHVSHFWRIWKDWSDUW\
WKH([FOXGHG3DUW\WKH([FOXGHG3DUW\VKDOOEHGHHPHG
WREHVHYHUHGRUH[FOXGHGIURPWKHSURYLVLRQDQGWKHSURYLVLRQ
VKDOOUHPDLQYDOLGHQIRUFHDEOHDQGDSSOLFDEOHLQUHVSHFWRIWKH
RWKHURUUHPDLQLQJ5HODWHG3DUWLHV
Connections
,)7+('$9352'8&7)$,/672:25.$6:$55$17('$%29(
<28562/($1'(;&/86,9(5(0('<6+$//%(5(3$,525
5(3/$&(0(172)7+('()(&7,9(3$57,112(9(17:,//
7&/726+,%$&25325$7,217+(,5$)),/,$7(6$'5V25
$63V7+(5(/$7('3$57,(6%(/,$%/(72<2825$1<
7+,5'3$57<)25$1<'$0$*(6021(<5(,0%856(0(17
&267625(;3(16(67+,6/,0,7$7,21$33/,(672'$0$*(6
021(<5(,0%856(0(17&267625(;3(16(62)$1<.,1'
:+$762(9(5,1&/8',1*$1<',5(&725,1',5(&7'$0$*(6
'$0$*(723523(57<253(5621/267352),76/267
6$9,1*6,1&219(1,(1&(2527+(563(&,$/,1&,'(17$/
(;(03/$5<25&216(48(17,$/'$0$*(6:+(7+(5)25
%5($&+2):$55$17<%5($&+2)&2175$&77257
,1&/8',1*1(*/,*(1&(81'(5$67$787(2581'(5$1<
27+(5/$:25)25025$&7,2125:+(7+(5$5,6,1*287
2)7+(86(2)25,1$%,/,7<7286(7+('$9352'8&7
(9(1,)$1<2)7+(5(/$7('3$57,(6+$6%((1$'9,6('2)
7+(3266,%,/,7<2)68&+'$0$*(6252)$1<&/$,0%<
$1<27+(53$57<
1RSHUVRQDJHQWGLVWULEXWRUGHDOHURUFRPSDQ\LVDXWKRUL]HGWR
FKDQJHPRGLI\RUH[WHQGWKHWHUPVRIWKHVHZDUUDQWLHVLQDQ\
PDQQHUZKDWVRHYHU
Introduction
LIMITED WARRANTY
Function Setup
&ULWLFDO$SSOLFDWLRQV
7KH'$93URGXFW\RXKDYHSXUFKDVHGLVQRWGHVLJQHGIRUDQ\´FULWLFDO
DSSOLFDWLRQVµ´&ULWLFDODSSOLFDWLRQVµPHDQVOLIHVXSSRUWV\VWHPV
PHGLFDODSSOLFDWLRQVFRQQHFWLRQVWRLPSODQWHGPHGLFDOGHYLFHV
FRPPHUFLDOWUDQVSRUWDWLRQQXFOHDUIDFLOLWLHVRUV\VWHPVRUDQ\RWKHU
DSSOLFDWLRQVZKHUH'$93URGXFWIDLOXUHFRXOGOHDGWRLQMXU\WRSHUVRQV
RUORVVRIOLIHRUFDWDVWURSKLFSURSHUW\GDPDJH
VCR Function
,)7+(&86720(586(67+('$9352'8&7,1$1<&5,7,&$/
$33/,&$7,217+(&86720(5²$1'1277&/,76$)),/,$7(6
$'5V25$63V²$6680(62/($1')8//5(63216,%,/,7<)25
68&+86(7&/5(6(59(67+(5,*+7725()86(726(59,&(
$1<'$9352'8&786(',1$&5,7,&$/$33/,&$7,217&/,76
$)),/,$7(6$'5V$1'$63V+(5(%<',6&/$,0$1<$1'$//
/,$%,/,7<'$0$*(6$1'&216(48(1&(6$5,6,1*2872)7+(
6(59,&(255()86$/726(59,&(68&+'$9352'8&7$1'
)857+(5',6&/$,0$1<$1'$///,$%,/,7<&216(48(1&(6$1'
'$0$*(67+$70$<$5,6(255(68/7)5207+(86(2)7+(
'$9352'8&7,1$1<&5,7,&$/$33/,&$7,216
Others
EN 111
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 111
2007/12/18 17:11:40
Introduction
GENERAL SETTING
HDMI (cont’d)
2
HDMI Audio (Default : ON)
Connections
If you do not want to output the audio through HDMI
(when you digitally output the audio through the
COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack to your audio system,
etc.), you can set the HDMI audio output off.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
• Set to “OFF” when the HDMI sound is not output.
Basic Setup
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Format
HDMI AudioHDMI Audio
RGB Range
ON HDMI CEC
OFF
Disc
Management
Your setting will be activated.
3
RGB Range (Default : Normal)
Recording
You can adjust the RGB range to make the dark areas of
the HDMI images brighter.
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].
• Select “Enhanced“ if the black-white contrast is not clear.
• This setting is effective only for HDMI RGB output.
General Setting
Format
RGB RangeHDMI Audio
RGB Range
NormalHDMI CEC
Enhanced
Playback
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Your setting will be activated.
Editing
Function Setup
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 97
97
2007/12/18 17:11:32
GENERAL SETTING
Reset All
Reset the setting to default.
OPEN/
CLOSE
INPUT
SELECT
HDMI
.@/:
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
TRACKING
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
SAT.LINK
3
Select “Yes” using [K / L] , then press
[ENTER].
TIMER
PROG.
SPACE
SETUP
1
2
Press [SETUP] in stop mode and use
[K / L] to select “General Setting”,
then press [ENTER].
DISPLAY
DISC MENU
Use [K / L] to select “Reset All”, then
press [ENTER].
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
AUDIO
TOP MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
RETURN
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x
SKIP
PLAY TIME SLIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SKIP
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
VCR
DVD
DUBBING
REC MODE
REC
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH
General Setting
Playback
Display
Video
Recording
Clock
DivX
HDMI
Reset All
Reset to factory default?
Yes
No
“Are you sure?” will appear. Select “Yes” using
[K / L] and then press [ENTER].
Your setting will be initialized.
ZOOM
SE-R0295
Note
• The settings listed below will remain unchanged
even after resetting to the factory default.
- Clock setting
- OSD language setting
- Parental lock setting
- DivX® VOD code
- V-Chip setting
- Timer programs
98
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 98
2007/12/18 17:11:32
Playback
3) During playback, press [PAUSE F].
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
Press [VCR] first.
Before recording, make sure:
• The appropriate external input position (L1/L2) to which
your external tuner is connected is selected by pressing
[INPUT SELECT ].
• There is a cassette tape with an erase-protection tab in
the unit.
• The desired recording speed is selected in SP (standard
playback) or SLP (super long playback) mode by
pressing [REC MODE].
Recording speed:
Tape speed
6) Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to eject the cassette tape.
Type of tape
T60
T120
T160
SP
1hour
2hours
2-2/3hours
SLP
3hours
6hours
8hours
• Refer to pages 38-41 for instructions on timer recording.
1) Press [REC I] to begin the recording.
To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press
[PAUSE F]. After the unit has been in pause mode for
5 minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the
cassette tape and the video head from damage.
Recording
5) Press [STOP C] to stop playback.
Recording / playback time
Disc
Management
4) Press [PLAY B] to resume playback.
Basic Setup
2) Insert a prerecorded cassette tape. Press [PLAY B]
to begin playback.
Recording
Connections
1) Press [I/y ON/STANDBY] on the remote control or
the front panel of the unit.
When you are playing back a cassette tape, turn on the
TV and be sure to select the input to which the unit is
connected.
Press [VCR].
Introduction
VCR FUNCTIONS
Note
Playback
• When a cassette tape ends during playback, fastforward or normal recording, the unit will
automatically rewind to the beginning of the
cassette tape. After rewinding finishes, the unit will
eject the cassette tape.
• When a cassette tape without erase-protection tab is
inserted, the unit will start playback automatically.
• Tracking will be automatically adjusted upon
playback. To adjust the tracking manually, press
/ ].
[TRACKING
erase-protection tab
Function Setup
Accidental erasure prevention
To prevent accidental recording on a
recorded cassette tape, remove its eraseprotection tab. To record on it later, cover
the hole with cellophane tape.
Editing
2) Press [STOP C] when the recording is completed.
VCR Function
Others
EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 99
99
2007/12/18 17:11:33
VCR FUNCTIONS
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)
This feature allows you to set the recording length simply
by pressing [REC I] on the remote control.
Press [VCR] first.
1) During normal recording, press [REC I] to begin
the one-touch timer recording.
You can select a fixed recording time by pressing
[REC I] repeatedly.
(Normal recording)
(8:00)
(0:30)
(1:00)
Index Search
An index mark will be assigned at the beginning of each
recording you make. You may skip to a specific marked
point by following the steps below.
Press [VCR] first.
1) Press [SEARCH] so that “INDEX SEARCH” menu
appears.
2) Using [the Number buttons], enter the number of
recordings you wish to skip within 30 seconds.
(7:30)
INDEX SEARCH
03
When the one-touch timer recording is finished, the
unit will turn off automatically.
To change the recording length during the one-touch
timer recording, press [REC I] repeatedly until the
desired length appear.
To cancel the one-touch timer recording within the
specified time, press [STOP C].
Note
• The remaining recording time will be displayed on
the front panel display during one-touch timer
recording. Press [DISPLAY] to see it on the TV screen.
• You cannot pause the one-touch timer recording.
• If VCR the one-touch timer recording is completed
during DVD playback or recording, the VCR will be in
stop mode and the DVD keeps the current mode.
• Unlike a timer recording, you can perform the
following operations during the one-touch timer
recording.
- Turning off the power (One-touch timer recording
will be canceled.).
- Using [REC I] or [STOP C].
• When the one-touch timer recording is finished and
the power is turned off, the unit will switch to the
standby mode automatically if a timer recording has
been programmed. Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the
standby mode for using the unit continuously.
3) Press [REV E], [FWD D] to start index search.
If you want to go in the forward direction, press
[FWD D].
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press
[REV E].
After index search, the VCR will play back the cassette
tape automatically.
CURRENT PROGRAM
Beginning
of tape
Pro.1
02
Pro.2
01
Pro.3
01
End
of tape
Pro.4
02
Pro.5
03
INDEX MARK
Note
• You can make the index mark up to 20.
100 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 100
2007/12/18 17:11:34
Time Search
Press [VCR] first.
1) Press [SEARCH] repeatedly so that “TIME SEARCH”
menu appears.
TIME SEARCH
2:50
MONO
non Hi-Fi tapes
Monaural
Monaural
Monaural
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded in
Hi-Fi stereo
L
R
L+R
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded main
audio program
Main audio
program
Main audio
program
Main audio
program
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded second
audio program
Second audio
program
Second audio
program
Second audio
program
VCR Function
R-channel
Function Setup
HIFI
L-channel
Editing
Your Selection
Type of recorded tape
Playback
• Index search and time search are not available
during recording.
• Press [STOP C] to stop the search.
• If the end of the cassette tape is reached during
search, this unit will cancel the search and rewind the
cassette tape.
Recording
Note
Fast forward:
When the unit is in stop mode, press [FWD D] to fast
forward the cassette tape.
Rewind:
When the unit is in stop mode, press [REV E] to rewind
the cassette tape.
To cue or review picture during playback (picture search):
Press [REV E], [FWD D] during playback.
Press it again and the unit will search in super high
speed. (in the SLP mode only)
To freeze the picture on TV screen during playback
(still mode):
Press [PAUSE F]. Each time you press the button, the
picture will be forwarded by one frame.
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still
/ ]
mode, stabilize the picture by pressing [TRACKING
on remote control.
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the
vertical hold control on your TV, if equipped.
Counter reset:
Press [CLEAR] to reset the counter to “0:00:00”.
To playback in slow motion:
Press [PAUSE F] during playback, then press [FWD D].
Press [FWD D] or [REV E] repeatedly to select the
desired speed.
Automatic rewind:
When a cassette tape is played back or fast forwarded to
its end, the cassette tape will rewind to the beginning,
stop and eject itself.
To repeat a playback indefinitely without touching
[PLAY B] (Auto Repeat Playback):
During normal playback, press [REPEAT]. When a tape is
played to its end, the tape will rewind to the beginning and
start playback itself. To cancel the Auto Repeat Playback,
press [REPEAT] again.
When you playback a cassette tape recorded in Hi-Fi
stereo:
Press [AUDIO ] on the remote control to select Hi-Fi or
MONO for playback sound mode.
• If you have connected a stereo TV to this unit, select “HIFI”.
• If you have connected a monaural TV to this unit, select
“MONO”.
Disc
Management
3) Press [REV E], [FWD D] to start time search.
If you want to go in the forward direction, press
[FWD D].
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press
[REV E].
After time search, the unit will play back the cassette
tape automatically.
Press [VCR] first.
Basic Setup
2) Using [the Number buttons], enter your desired
time to skip within 30 seconds.
You can set the time up to 9:59.
Other Operations
Connections
This feature allows you to go to a specific point on a
cassette tape by entering the exact amount of time you
wish to skip in order to reach the point.
Introduction
VCR FUNCTIONS
Note
Others
• Still/slow mode will stop after 5 minutes to prevent
damage to the cassette tape and the video head.
• To return to playback from the picture search/still/
slow mode, press [PLAY B].
EN 101
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 101
2007/12/18 17:11:35
TROUBLESHOOTING
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing.
Some simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and restore proper operation.
Symptom
The power does not turn on.
Remedy
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.
• Check the breaker (in case of power failure).
• Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the timer standby mode.
There is no picture.
• Re-connect the connecting cords securely.
• Check if the connecting cords are damaged.
• Check the connection to your TV (page 21).
• Check if the progressive scan mode is set correctly according to your TV
(page 94).
• Switch the input selector on your TV (such as to “L1”) so that the signal
from the unit appears on the TV screen.
Cannot record a TV program.
• This unit does not have a tuner to receive TV broadcasting.
• You must connect this unit to an external tuner to record TV programs
(page 19).
TV program pictures are distorted.
• Check if all the connections are made correctly (page 21).
Playback picture is distorted.
• Keep the device which may cause electrical disturbances, such as a
cellular phone, away.
Playback picture or TV program from • If the playback picture output from a DVD player, VCR or tuner goes
the device connected through the unit through the unit before reaching your TV, the copy-protection signal
is distorted.
applied to some programs could affect picture quality. Disconnect the
playback device in question and connect it directly to your TV.
There is no sound.
• Re-connect all connections securely.
• Check if the connecting cord is damaged.
• Check the connections to the amplifier input.
• Check if the input device setting on the amplifier is correct.
• When the unit is in pause mode or in slow-motion playback mode,
sound is not output. This is not a malfunction.
• When the unit is in fast forward or fast reverse mode, sound is not
output. This is not a malfunction.
• If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(COAXIAL) jack, check the setting in “Audio Out” (page 89).
No DTS sound on digital output.
• Change the setting menu for “DTS” to “ON”.
D
V
D
•
V
C No DTS sound from analog output
R
Nothing was recorded even though
you set the timer setting correctly.
• This unit has no analog sound output when playing back the selected
DTS sound mode.
• There was a power failure during recording.
• The unit’s internal clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for
more than 30 seconds. Reset the clock (page 26).
• The program contains copy protection signals that restricts copying.
• The timer setting overlapped with another setting that has priority.
Timer recording does not start.
• No disc is inserted.
• A disc is not recordable (finalized DVD-RW/-R, finalized DVD+R, a fully
recorded disc, etc.).
Timer recording is not complete or did • The timer setting overlapped with another setting that has priority
not start from the beginning.
(page 41).
• Disc space was not enough.
• “Make Recording Compatible“ is not set to “ON”, when recording onto
DVD+RW/+R that was recorded on other unit.
Timer recording is impossible.
appears on the front panel display of this unit. If not, press
• Make sure
[TIMER SET].
The remote control does not function. • Batteries are weak.
• There are obstacles between the remote control and the unit.
• The remote control is far from the unit.
• There are no batteries in the remote control.
• Check if the unit is turned on.
• The remote control is not pointed at the infrared sensor window on the unit.
• Press [DVD] or [VCR], whichever you need. Then, try again.
• Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the timer standby mode.
The unit does not operate properly.
• When static electricity, etc., causes the unit to operate abnormally,
unplug the unit and then plug it in again.
102 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 102
2007/12/18 17:11:36
Symptom
DV signal cannot be input.
Picture noise appears.
Playback picture from the external
devices connected to this unit is
distorted.
There is no sound.
Sound is noisy.
The disc does not play back.
D
V
D
Playback image freezes for a second.
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the
operations. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the disc.
• The title does not have the multilingual audio tracks.
• The DVD-video prohibits the changing of the language for the sound
track.
Others
The unit starts playing back the disc
automatically.
Some functions such as stop, search,
or slow-motion playback cannot be
performed.
The language for the sound track
cannot be changed.
VCR Function
Discs recorded on this unit cannot be
played back on other DVD players.
The disc does not start playback from
the beginning.
Function Setup
• If the setup menu appears on the TV screen, press [RETURN] to exit.
• Check if the progressive scan mode is set correctly according to your TV
(page 94).
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
• If the picture output signal from the external devices passes through this
unit to get to your TV, the copy protection signal applied to some DVD could
affect the picture quality. Disconnect the playback device in question and
connect it directly to your TV.
• If you are using DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT (COAXIAL) jack, check the setting
in “Audio Out” (page 24).
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
• No disc is inserted.
• A blank disc is inserted.
• The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.
• The disc is not correctly inserted.
• The unit cannot play back certain discs (such as a CD-ROM) (page 10).
• The region code on the DVD-video does not match the unit (page 10).
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and leave the
unit turned on for about 2 hours until the moisture evaporates (page 4).
• If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the unit cannot play back
the disc if it was not finalized.
• During the playback of 2 layered disc, picture may freeze for a moment
when the 1st layer switches to the 2nd layer. This is not a malfunction.
• If you are using DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R, please ensure you finalized the
disc after recording (pages 30-32).
• Resume playback was activated (page 58). Press [STOP C] twice.
• You have inserted a disc whose title menu or DVD menu automatically
appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted.
• The DVD-video features an auto playback function.
Editing
There is no picture.
Playback
• For recording with the DVC, the recording audio signal can be set to 12
bits or 16 bits. However, when 16-bit recording mode is selected, audio
signal cannot be switched. To record an audio signal, set it to 12 bits.
Recording
DV audio signal cannot be switched.
Disc
Management
• Some functions may not operate depending on the type of DVC. For
example, if the DVC does not support slow playback mode, the slow
playback function is disabled.
• With L3 (DV), the disc display menu does not appear unless disc
playback is executed.
Basic Setup
• Signal input or DVC operation from this unit may be disabled
depending on the type of DVC.
• If a DVC signal cannot be input, use an external input (L1/L2) for analog
connection via audio/video cables.
• DVC control may be disabled depending on the type of DVC, even in a
mode other than camera mode. In this case, switch to DVD control and
execute the normal recording procedure while operating the DVC.
Connections
D
The DVC cannot be operated with this
V unit.
D
•
V
C
R Certain functions of the unit cannot
operate.
Remedy
• Before connection, turn on the power supplies for both this unit and the
DVC, and make sure that these units are in stop mode.
• Only a “DVC-SD” signal can be input from the DVC to this unit. Other
types of signals are not supported.
• Do not connect any device other than the DVC. Even if a recorder or PC
with another DV terminal is connected, the DV function will not operate.
• If the DVC is not recognized after connection, turn off the power supply
for the unit and re-connect the DVC.
Introduction
TROUBLESHOOTING
EN 103
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 103
2007/12/18 17:11:36
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
The subtitle language cannot be
changed or turned off.
The angles cannot be changed.
Recording does not stop immediately
after you press [STOP C].
The disc tray does not open when you
press [OPEN/CLOSE A].
“Repairing” appears on the TV screen.
Repairing
D
V
D
88%
In a case you intend to cancel the
repairing process.
Do you want to cancel a repairing
process ? When selecting “Yes”,
the disc may not be usable.
Remedy
• Multilingual subtitle are not recorded on the DVD-video.
• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD-video being played back.
• The angle-change operation is whenever possible as long as the disc
contains a multi-angle portion. Actual change will be performed when
the portion has come up.
• The DVD-video prohibits changing angles.
• Try changing the angle using the DVD-video’s menu.
• It may take a few seconds for the unit to input disc data before
recording stops.
• It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you have
recorded or edited a disc. This is because the unit is adding disc data to
the disc.
• If there is a power failure or unplugging during recording, finalizing,
formatting or editing (even after “Repairing” disappears), a repairing
process will begin automatically just after turning the unit on again.
It may take several minutes up to about several hours.
• If you intend to cancel the repairing process, press [A OPEN/CLOSE]
on the front panel, then select “Yes” and press [ENTER]. After that, press
[OPEN/CLOSE A] to take out the disc. The disc canceled during the
repairing process MAY NOT work.
Yes
No
Repairing
88%
No image from HDMI connection.
• Check the HDMI connection. (Check the status of the HDMI related
indications.)
• Check whether the connected monitor device or other device supports
HDCP. (This unit will not output a video signal unless the other device
supports HDCP.)
• Check the setting of HDMI.
• Check whether the output format of this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches
the supported input format of other connected device.
• If the unit is connected to the unauthorized display device with an
HDMI cable, the audio/video signal may not be output when playing
back a commercial DVD-video.
There is no sound or the sound is
distorted.
• The HDMI sound is not output when “HDMI Audio” is set to “OFF”.
• Check the RCA audio cable connection. If you are using HDMI-DVI
conversion cable, you must connect the RCA audio cable, too.
• Check whether the output format of this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches
the supported input format of other connected device.
There is no picture.
• If you connect the cable to S-VIDEO OUT/ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT /
HDMI OUT jack, try connecting it to AUDIO / VIDEO OUT jack instead.
Picture noise appears.
• Head cleaning for VCR may be necessary. Refer to “Auto Head Cleaning”
(page 5).
• Adjust tracking control for better picture by pressing [TRACKING
/ ]
while you are playing back a cassette tape.
V
C The cassette tape does not play back. • No cassette tape is inserted.
• Make sure the cassette tape has an erase-protection tab when you
R The tape ejected after you press
[REC I].
record to a cassette tape. If needed, cover the hole with cellophane
tape.
The remote control does not function. • Check if a cassette tape is in this unit.
The motor rotates even when
• The motor may rotate for the duration of approximately 5 minutes for
efficient operation. This is not a malfunction.
playback / recording is stopped.
104 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 104
2007/12/18 17:11:36
Error message
Cause
Solution
• Unplayable disc is inserted in the unit.
• The disc is upside down.
• Playback is not authorized in the region
of the DVD-video which you inserted in
the unit.
• The current selected parental level
prohibits playback.
• Insert the standardized disc which have
the marks on pages 9-10.
• Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.
• Insert the DVD-video with region codes
1 or ALL.
• Check “Parental Lock” setting in
“Playback” menu (page 88).
• You are trying to record onto the protected
disc which is set in “DVD Menu” menu.
• You are trying to record onto the disc
which has no space for recording.
• Release the disc protect setting in “DVD
Menu” menu (page 29).
• Insert the recordable disc with enough
recording space.
• You are trying to record onto the DVDRW/-R on which the number of recording
titles comes up to the maximum (99).
• You are trying to record onto the VR mode
DVD-RW on which the number of recording
chapters comes up to the maximum (999).
• You are trying to record onto the DVD+RW/
+R on which the number of recording titles
comes up to the maximum (49).
• Delete unnecessary titles (page 72).
Recording Error
You cannot record more than 254 chapters on one disc.
(The maximum is 254)
• You are trying to record onto the DVD+RW
on which the number of recording
chapters comes up to the maximum (254).
• Delete unnecessary chapter marks
(page 77).
Recording Error
You cannot record on this disc as Control
Information is full.
• This disc has no space to write the Control
Information when recording or deleting contents.
When editing has been repeatedly performed,
the control Information area may come up to be
full even the recording area has enough space.
• When recordings are performed
repeatedly onto an unstable disc, this
area may come up to be full.
• Every time you insert a disc for recording,
the disc’s working area will be taken up.
And if you repeat this frequently, it will
be used up sooner and you may not be
able to record full 49 titles.
• You are trying to record onto the disc
already finalized.
• You are trying to record onto the
unfinalized +VR mode discs recorded
on other unit.
• Delete unnecessary titles
(page 72).
• Delete unnecessary titles (page 72).
Editing
• Insert a new disc.
• Undo the finalizing for this disc
(page 32).
• Set “Make Recording Compatible” to
“ON” to rewrite the menu, after that you
will record to disc (page 34).
Frequently Asked Questions
No, this unit records only DVD.
Possible when the region code of the disc is 1 and All.
No, you cannot control the unit by PC.
Yes, you can. Select “L1” or “L2” as your recording channel,
and leave the cable/satellite box on (pages 20, 38-41).
Others
– Can I record to CD-RW/-R?
– Can I play back DVD-video that is bought in another country?
– Can I connect the unit to my PC?
– Can I program a timer recording with cable/satellite box?
VCR Function
* If you are still having trouble with the unit after checking “TROUBLESHOOTING”, write down the error code and the
error description for calling our help line to locate an Authorized Service Center.
Function Setup
Recording Error
This disc is already finalized.
Recording Error
The disc has no recording compatibility.
Set “Make Recording Compatible” to
“ON” to convert the disc.
• Delete unnecessary chapter marks
(page 77).
Playback
Recording Error
You cannot record on this disc as Power
Calibration Area is full.
Recording
Recording Error
This disc is protected and not recordable.
Recording Error
Disc is full.
(No area for new recording)
Recording Error
You cannot record more than 99 titles on one disc.
(The maximum is 99)
Recording Error
You cannot record more than 999 chapters on one disc.
(The maximum is 999)
Recording Error
You cannot record more than 49 titles on one disc.
(The maximum is 49)
Recording Error
This program is not allowed to be
recorded on this disc.
• Insert the DVD-RW disc in VR mode
(ver.1.1 or 1.2 compatible with CPRM).
• Insert the recordable disc, and ensure
the disc status satisfies the recording
requirements (page 9).
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
• Replace the disc.
• Insert the DVD-RW disc in VR mode
(ver.1.1 or 1.2 compatible with CPRM).
Disc
Management
• You cannot record copy prohibited
programs.
• Set “Format Mode” to “VR mode”
(pages 27-28).
Basic Setup
• You are trying to record the copy
prohibited program.
• You are trying to record the copy-once
program onto the DVD-RW disc in
Video mode.
• You are trying to record the copy-once
program.
• You are trying to record onto the disc
which is unrecordable, or the disc status
is unable to record.
• The disc is dirty.
• The disc is damaged.
• You are trying to record the copy-once
program onto the DVD-RW disc which
is not compatible with CPRM.
Connections
Disc Error
— Please eject the disc. —
Playback feature may not be available on this disc.
Region Error
— Please eject the disc. —
Playback is not authorized in your region.
Parental Lock On
The current selected parental level
prohibits playback.
Recording Error
This program is not allowed to be recorded.
Recording Error
This program is not recordable in Video
mode.
Recording Error
This program is not recordable in +VR mode.
Recording Error
Cannot record on this disc.
Introduction
TROUBLESHOOTING
EN 105
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 105
2007/12/18 17:11:37
LANGUAGE CODE
Language
Abkhazian
Afar
Afrikaans
Albanian
Amharic
Arabic
Armenian
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Basque
Bengali;Bangla
Bhutani
Bihari
Bislama
Breton
Bulgarian
Burmese
Byelorussian
Cambodian
Catalan
Chinese
Corsican
Croatian
Czech
Danish
Dutch
English
Esperanto
Estonian
Faroese
Fiji
Finnish
French
Frisian
Galician
Georgian
German
Greek
Greenlandic
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hebrew
Hindi
Code
4748
4747
4752
6563
4759
4764
5471
4765
4771
4772
4847
5167
4860
5072
4854
4855
4864
4853
5971
4851
5759
4947
7254
4961
5464
4965
5047
6058
5160
5161
5166
5261
5256
5255
5264
5271
5358
5747
5051
5158
5758
5360
5367
5447
5569
5455
Language
Hungarian
Icelandic
Indonesian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Irish
Italian
Japanese
Javanese
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kazakh
Kinyarwanda
Kirghiz
Kirundi
Korean
Kurdish
Laothian
Latin
Latvian; Lettish
Lingala
Lithuanian
Macedonian
Malagasy
Malay
Malayalam
Maltese
Maori
Marathi
Moldavian
Mongolian
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Occitan
Oriya
Oromo (Afan)
Panjabi
Pashto; Pushto
Persian
Polish
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Romanian
Code
5467
5565
5560
5547
5551
5557
5347
5566
5647
5669
5760
5765
5757
6469
5771
6460
5761
5767
5861
5847
5868
5860
5866
5957
5953
5965
5958
5966
5955
5964
5961
5960
6047
6051
6061
6149
6164
6159
6247
6265
5247
6258
6266
6367
6459
6461
Language
Russian
Samoan
Sangho
Sanskrit
Scots Gaelic
Serbian
Serbo-Croatian
Sesotho
Setswana
Shona
Sindhi
Singhalese
Siswat
Slovak
Slovenian
Somali
Spanish
Sundanese
Swahili
Swedish
Tagalog
Tajik
Tamil
Tatar
Telugu
Thai
Tibetan
Tigrinya
Tonga
Tsonga
Turkish
Turkmen
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Welsh
Wolof
Xhosa
Yiddish
Yoruba
Zulu
Code
6467
6559
6553
6547
5350
6564
6554
6566
6660
6560
6550
6555
6565
6557
6558
6561
5165
6567
6569
6568
6658
6653
6647
6666
6651
6654
4861
6655
6661
6665
6664
6657
6669
6757
6764
6772
6855
6861
4971
6961
7054
5655
7161
7267
106 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 106
2007/12/18 17:11:37
PCM (pulse code modulation)
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also
“Digital Audio”.
The most common system of encoding digital audio,
found on CD and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amplifiers with
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and
MPEG audio to PCM. See also “Digital Audio”.
Aspect Ratio
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the TV screen
is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the TV
screen is almost twice as wide as it is high).
Chapter
Component Video Output
A type of display that does not split each frame into
fields, and instead scans directly through all the scanlines
of each frame in order. Progressive scan provides less
flickering and higher image resolution than traditional
(480i) TV signals. Refer to page 94 for instructions on
selective progressive scan mode.
Region Code
Digital Audio
Sampling Frequency
DivX®
DivX® is a codec (compression/decompression) that can
compress images to a very small amount of data.
The rate which sound is measured by a specified interval
to turn into digital audio data. The numbers of sampling
in one second defines as sampling frequency. The higher
the rate, the better the sound quality.
S-Video Output
It delivers independently each signal of color(C) and
luminance(Y) to TV as video signals, so that higher-quality
picture will be gained.
Title (DVD only)
The system to compress digital sound developed by
Dolby Laboratories. It offers you sound of stereo(2ch) or
multi channel audio.
Track
DTS® (Digital Theater System)
Video mode
DTS is a multi channel surround sound system. By
connecting to DTS decoder you can enjoy dynamic and
realistic sound like movie theatre. DTS surround sound
technologies were developed by DTS, Inc.
Video mode is the same recording format as used on
the DVD videos you purchase in local shops. You can
play back the discs recorded in this format in most DVD
players, however it offers only limited editing. You will
need to finalize discs recorded in video mode before
playing them back on other unit.
To make DVD, which have been recorded on, possible to
play back in DVD players.
A digital interface between audio and video source. It can
transmit component video, audio, and control signal with
one cable connection.
JPEG (joint photographic experts group)
VR mode
A basic recording format for DVD-RW. VR mode offers
advanced editing, however it is playable only on VR
mode compatible unit. Finalization is recommended
before playing them back on other unit.
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio)
WMA is the audio compressing technology developed by
Microsoft. You can copy WMA files on CD-RW/-R from a
computer and play them back on this unit.
MP3 (MPEG audio layer 3)
+VR mode
MP3 is a method of compressing files. You can copy MP3
files on CD-RW/-R from the computer and play back the
files on this unit.
A recording format for DVD+RW/+R. +VR mode offers basic
editing, and it is playable on most DVD players. Finalization
is recommended before playing them back on other unit.
VCR Function
JPEG is a method of compressing still image files. You can
copy JPEG files on CD-RW/-R from a computer and play
back the files on this unit.
Function Setup
HDMI™ (high definition multimedia interface)
Audio CD use tracks to divide up the content of a disc.
The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also “Chapter”.
Editing
A collection of chapters on DVD. See also “Chapter”.
Playback
Dolby® Digital
Finalize
Recording
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analogto-digital converter, generating a stream of numbers.
On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates
an analog signal based on these numbers. See also
“Sampling Frequency” and “Analog Audio”.
Regions associate discs and players with particular areas
of the world. This unit will only play back discs that have
compatible region codes. You can find the region code
of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).
Disc
Management
Each signal of luminance (Y) and component (PB/CB, PR/
CR) is independent to output so that you can experience
picture color as it is.
Also, due to compatibility with progressive video (480p),
you can experience higher-density picture than that in
interlace (480i).
Basic Setup
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on a
DVD is usually divided into chapters. See also “Title”.
Progressive Scan (480p)
Connections
Analog Audio
Introduction
GLOSSARY
Others
EN 107
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 107
2007/12/18 17:11:37
SPECIFICATIONS
• This model complies with the below specifications.
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.
General
System
VCR video heads
Power requirements
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions (width x height x depth)
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
TV format
Recording
Recording format
Recording discs
Video recording format
Sampling frequency
Compression format
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency
Compression format
Input / Output
Video input
Input level
Jacks
Video output
Output level
Jack
S-video input
Y (luminance) - Input level
C (color) - Input level
Jacks
S-video output
Y (luminance) - Output level
C (color) - Output level
Jack
Component video output
Output level
Jacks
HDMI output
Jack
Audio input
During audio input
Jacks
Audio output
During audio output
Jacks
Digital audio output
Output level
Jack
DV input
Jack
DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R, DVD-video, CD-DA, CD-RW/-R,
VHS cassette tape
Four heads
AC120 V, 60 Hz
30 W (standby: 3.3 W)
9.5 lbs ( 4.3 kg )
17.2” x 4.0” x 10.6” (435 x 99.5 x 268 mm)
41 °F to 104 °F (5 °C to 40 °C)
Less than 80% (no condensation)
NTSC TV standard
VR (video recording) format
Video format
+VR format
DVD-Rewritable/-Recordable, DVD+Rewritable/+Recordable
13.5 MHz
MPEG
48 kHz
Dolby Digital/LPCM (XP Recording mode only)
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
Output 1 (rear)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
Input 1 (rear)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
286 mVp-p (75Ω)
4 pin mini DIN
Output 1 (rear)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
286 mVp-p (75Ω)
4 pin mini DIN
Output 1 (rear)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75Ω), PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jacks
HDMI jack
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
2 V rms (input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
RCA jacks
Output 1 L/R (rear)
2 V rms (output impedance: less than 1 kΩ)
RCA jacks
Output 1 (rear) COAXIAL
500 mVp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
IEEE 1394
DV input jack (4 pin)
108 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 108
2007/12/18 17:11:38
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the United States.
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DAV PRODUCT
AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
DAV PRODUCTS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED
IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration Card
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DAV Product.
Your Responsibility
(1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide other proof of purchase.
(2) All warranty servicing of this DAV Product must be made pursuant
to the TACP DAV Product Warranty Exchange Program.
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.
The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any
obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law
of the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90)
days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect.
This limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under state law.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW
LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN
AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer
controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered
by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna
systems are your responsibility.
VCR Function
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as
limited above, and do not extend to any DAV Product or parts that
have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DAV Product
or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as
lightning or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation,
improper maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by
TACP; use or malfunction through simultaneous use of this DAV Product
and connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had
the serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.
Function Setup
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if the DAV Product is
purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.
S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXPRESSLY
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET
FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY WARRANTIES
IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY
LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND
SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE REPAIR
OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE
LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY
USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DAV PRODUCT).
Editing
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
For additional information, visit TACP’s website: www.tacp.toshiba.com
Playback
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your
DAV Product on-line at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as possible.
By registering your DAV Product you will enable TACP to bring you new
products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact
you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the U.S.
Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to complete and return the product
registration card does not diminish your warranty rights.
(2) You must include the original bill of sale (or a copy of the original bill
of sale) or other proof of purchase along with the entire DAV Product
when sending the DAV Product to the TACP Warranty Exchange Center
specified by TACP’s Consumer Solutions Center. You are responsible
for all inbound transportation and insurance charges for the DAV Product
to the TACP Warranty Exchange Center.
Recording
Commercial Units
DAV Products sold and used for commercial purposes have a limited
warranty for all parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date of
original retail purchase and ends on the date that is ninety (90) days
thereafter.
(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty service for your DAV Product
under the TACP DAV Product Warranty Exchange Program, contact
TACP’s Consumer Solutions Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.
Disc
Management
Rental Units
The warranty for DAV Product rental units begins on the date of the first
rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,
whichever comes first.
How to Obtain Warranty Services
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking
the section “TROUBLESHOOTING,” you find that service is needed:
Basic Setup
Limited Warranty
TACP warrants this DAV Product and its parts against defects in materials
or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original
retail purchase.
DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE DAV
PRODUCT WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED DAV PRODUCT WITHOUT
CHARGE TO YOU. DURING THE PERIOD THAT COMMENCES ON THE
DATE THAT IS NINETY ONE (91) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL
RETAIL PURCHASE AND ENDS ON THE DATE THAT IS THREE HUNDRED
SIXTY FIVE (365) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL
PURCHASE, TACP WILL EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE DAV PRODUCT
WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED DAV PRODUCT FOR A FEE.
Connections
DAV PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA
AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Introduction
LIMITED WARRANTY
Limited United States Warranty
Digital Audio Video (“DAV”) Product - Exchange Warranty
Others
EN 109
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 109
2007/12/18 17:11:38
LIMITED WARRANTY
/LPLWHG&DQDGLDQ:DUUDQW\
)RU7RVKLED%UDQG'LJLWDO$XGLR9LGHR3URGXFWV
7RVKLEDRI&DQDGD/LPLWHG7&/PDNHVWKHIROORZLQJOLPLWHGZDUUDQWLHVWRRULJLQDOFRQVXPHUVLQ&DQDGD7+(6(/,0,7('
:$55$17,(6(;7(1'727+(25,*,1$/&21680(5385&+$6(525$1<3(56215(&(,9,1*7+,6726+,%$%5$1'
',*,7$/$8',29,'(2352'8&7WKH'$9352'8&76RU'$93URGXFWV$6$*,)7)5207+(25,*,1$/&21680(5
385&+$6(5$1'721227+(5385&+$6(52575$16)(5((
'$9352'8&76385&+$6(',1&$1$'$$1'86('$1<:+(5(2876,'(2)&$1$'$,1&/8',1*:,7+287/,0,7$7,21
7+(81,7('67$7(6$1'0(;,&2$5(127&29(5('%<7+(6(:$55$17,(6
'$9352'8&76385&+$6('$1<:+(5(2876,'(2)&$1$'$,1&/8',1*:,7+287/,0,7$7,217+(81,7('67$7(6
$1'0(;,&2$1'86(',1&$1$'$$5(127&29(5('%<7+(6(:$55$17,(6
/LPLWHG2QH<HDU:DUUDQW\RQ3DUWVDQG/DERXU
6XEMHFWWRWKHPRUHOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\LIWKH'$93URGXFWLVXVHGIRU
DQ\FRPPHUFLDORUEXVLQHVVSXUSRVHVDVVHWRXWEHORZ7&/
ZDUUDQWVWKH'$93URGXFWDQGLWVSDUWVDJDLQVWPDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQ
PDWHULDOVRUZRUNPDQVKLSWKDWUHVXOWLQWKH'$93URGXFWIDLOLQJIRU
DSHULRGRIRQH\HDUDIWHUWKHGDWHRIRULJLQDOUHWDLOSXUFKDVH
'85,1*7+,63(5,2'7&/:,//$77&/·6237,215(3$,5
255(3/$&($'()(&7,9(3$57:,7+$1(:25
5()85%,6+('3$57:,7+287&+$5*(72<28)25
3$57625/$%285<280867'(/,9(57+((17,5('$9
352'8&772$7&/'$9352'8&7$87+25,=('6(59,&(
3529,'(5$63<2808673$<)25$//
75$163257$7,21$1',1685$1&(&+$5*(6)257+(
'$9352'8&772$1')5207+($63
5HQWDO8QLWV
7KHZDUUDQW\IRU'$93URGXFWUHQWDOXQLWVEHJLQVZLWKWKHGDWHRI
ILUVWUHQWDORUWKLUW\GD\VIURPWKHGDWHRIVKLSPHQWWRWKHUHQWDO
ILUPZKLFKHYHUFRPHVILUVW
/LPLWHG:DUUDQW\IRU&RPPHUFLDO8QLWV
7&/ZDUUDQWV'$93URGXFWVWKDWDUHXVHGIRUDQ\FRPPHUFLDORU
EXVLQHVVSXUSRVHVDVIROORZVDOOSDUWVDUHZDUUDQWHGDJDLQVW
PDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQPDWHULDOVRUZRUNPDQVKLSWKDWUHVXOWLQWKH'$9
3URGXFWIDLOLQJIRUDSHULRGRIQLQHW\GD\VDIWHUWKHGDWHRI
RULJLQDOUHWDLOSXUFKDVH'85,1*7+,63(5,2'7&/:,//
$77&/·6237,215(3$,5255(3/$&($'()(&7,9(3$57
:,7+$1(:255()85%,6+('3$57:,7+287&+$5*(
72<28)253$57625/$%285<280867'(/,9(57+(
(17,5('$9352'8&772$1$63<2808673$<)25$//
75$163257$7,21$1',1685$1&(&+$5*(6)257+(
'$9352'8&772$1')5207+($63
<RXU5HVSRQVLELOLW\
7+($%29(:$55$17,(6$5(68%-(&7727+(
)2//2:,1*&21',7,216
<RXPXVWSURYLGH\RXUELOORIVDOHRURWKHUSURRIRISXUFKDVH
$OOZDUUDQW\VHUYLFLQJRIWKLV'$93URGXFWPXVWEHSHUIRUPHG
E\DQ$63
7KHZDUUDQWLHVIURP7&/DUHHIIHFWLYHRQO\LIWKH'$93URGXFW
LVLSXUFKDVHGDVQHZDQGXQRSHQHGIURP7&/RUIURP7&/·V
DXWKRUL]HGGLVWULEXWRUVGHDOHUVRUUHVHOOHUV$'5·VDQGLL
ORFDWHGRSHUDWHGLQ&DQDGD
:DUUDQWLHVH[WHQGRQO\WRPDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQPDWHULDOVRU
ZRUNPDQVKLSDVOLPLWHGDERYHDQGGRQRWH[WHQGWR
D 6HUYLFHUHSDLUVRUUHSODFHPHQWPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\DFFLGHQW
PLVXVHDEXVHPRLVWXUHOLTXLGVGXVWGLUWQHJOHFWDFFLGHQW
GDPDJHDSSOLFDWLRQVLPSURSHULQVWDOODWLRQLPSURSHU
RSHUDWLRQLPSURSHUFOHDQLQJLPSURSHUPDLQWHQDQFHQRUPDO
ZHDUDQGWHDURUDQ\RWKHUH[WHUQDOFDXVHRUHYHQWDFWRU
RPLVVLRQRXWVLGHWKHFRQWURORI7&/LQFOXGLQJILUHWKHIWDFWV
RI*RGDOWHUDWLRQSRZHUIDLOXUHVSRZHUVXUJHVRUSRZHU
VKRUWDJHVOLJKWQLQJRWKHUHOHFWULFDOIDXOWVRUUHSDLUV
PRGLILFDWLRQVRUUHSODFHPHQWVE\SHUVRQVRWKHUWKDQWKRVH
DXWKRUL]HGE\7&/WRVHUYLFHWKH'$93URGXFW
E 5HSODFHPHQWRIPLVVLQJGLVFDUGHGRUORVWSDUWVWKH
SURYLVLRQRIUHWURILWVRUSUHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH
F 5HSDLURIGDPDJHWKDWLVFRVPHWLFRQO\RUGRHVQRWDIIHFW
WKH'$93URGXFWIXQFWLRQDOLW\VXFKDVZHDUDQGWHDU
VFUDWFKHVDQGGHQWV
G 6HUYLFHRQ7RVKLEDEUDQGHGDFFHVVRU\LWHPVVXFK
DFFHVVRU\LWHPVPD\EHFRYHUHGE\WKHLURZQZDUUDQW\
H 6HUYLFHRQWKLUGSDUW\SURGXFWVRUVHUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\
E\XVHRILQFRPSDWLEOHWKLUGSDUW\SURGXFWV
I 6HUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\WKHVLPXOWDQHRXVXVHRIWKLV
'$93URGXFWDQGFRQQHFWHGHTXLSPHQW
J 0RGLILFDWLRQVWRWKH'$93URGXFWQRWDSSURYHGLQZULWLQJ
E\7&/DQGVHUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\WKHXVHRU
LQVWDOODWLRQRIQRQ7RVKLEDPRGLILFDWLRQVWRWKH'$9
3URGXFW
K 6HUYLFHRID'$93URGXFWRQZKLFKWKH726+,%$ODEHORU
ORJRUDWLQJODEHORUVHULDOQXPEHUKDYHEHHQGHIDFHGRU
UHPRYHG
L 2QVLWHVHUYLFHDQGUHSDLURIWKH'$93URGXFW
M 'DPDJHWRWKH'$93URGXFWFDXVHGE\IDLOXUHWRIROORZ
WKHVSHFLILFDWLRQV8VHUPDQXDOVRUJXLGHVDVWRXVDJH
DQGRUVWRUDJH
'LVFODLPHUDQG/LPLWDWLRQRI5HPHG\
727+((;7(1712735(&/8'('%</$:$//27+(5
(;35(66$1',03/,(':$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'
5(35(6(17$7,216)257+,6'$9352'8&7,1&/8',1*
7+(,03/,(':$55$17,(6$1'&21',7,2162)
0(5&+$17$%,/,7<$1'),71(66)25$3$57,&8/$5
385326($5(+(5(%<',6&/$,0('$1'(;&/8'('
,)7+($33/,&$%/(/$:67$78725<2527+(5:,6(
35(&/8'(67+((;&/86,212)$1<,03/,('
:$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'5(35(6(17$7,216
7+(168&+,03/,(':$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'
5(35(6(17$7,216$5(27+(5:,6(/,0,7(',1
'85$7,21727+(7(502)7+,6(;35(66:5,77(1
/,0,7(':$55$17<727+((;7(1712735(&/8'('
%</$:67$78725<2527+(5:,6(7+,6:5,77(1
:$55$17<683(5&('(6$1'63(&,),&$//<',6&/$,06
$1<27+(5:$55$17<&21',7,21255(35(6(17$7,21
12767$7(',17+,6:$55$17<:+(7+(50$'(%<
7&/726+,%$&25325$7,217+(,5$)),/,$7(6$'5V
$1'$63V$1':+(7+(50$'(25$//<25,1:5,7,1*
,1&/8',1*$1<67$7(0(17,1$1<%52&+85(35(66
5(/($6($11281&(0(17$'9(57,6(0(1732,172)
6$/(',63/$<(7&
<2808675($'$1')2//2:$//6(783$1'86$*(
,16758&7,216,17+($33/,&$%/(86(5*8,'(6$1'25
0$18$/6,)<28)$,/72'2627+,6'$9352'8&70$<
127)81&7,213523(5/<$1'<280$<68))(5'$0$*(
7+,6:$55$17<:,//127&29(5$1<6(59,&(7+$7,6
5(48,5(',13$5725,1:+2/($6$5(68/72)$1<
)$,/85(72)2//2:7+(6(783$1'86$*(
,16758&7,2167+,6:$55$17<'2(6127$33/<$1'
6+$//%(92,'$1'81(1)25&($%/(,)7+('$9
352'8&7,623(1('6(59,&('255(3$,5('%<
3(5621627+(57+$17+26($87+25,=('%<7&/72
6(59,&(255(3$,57+('$9352'8&7
110 EN
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 110
2007/12/18 17:11:38
7RWKHH[WHQWSHUPLWWHGE\ODZWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\VKDOOEH
JRYHUQHGDQGFRQVWUXHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHODZVRI2QWDULR
+RZWR2EWDLQ:DUUDQW\6HUYLFHV
,IDIWHUIROORZLQJDOORIWKHRSHUDWLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVLQWKLVPDQXDO
DQGFKHFNLQJWKH7URXEOHVKRRWLQJVHFWLRQ\RXILQGWKDW
VHUYLFHLVQHHGHG
Recording
7RILQGWKHQHDUHVW$63YLVLW7&/·VZHEVLWHDW
ZZZWRVKLEDFDRUFDOOWROOIUHH
3UHVHQW\RXUELOORIVDOHRURWKHUSURRIRISXUFKDVHWRWKH
$63
)RUDGGLWLRQDOLQIRUPDWLRQYLVLW7&/
VZHEVLWHDWZZZWRVKLEDFD
Disc
Management
,IWKHUHLVDQ\LQFRQVLVWHQF\EHWZHHQWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\RQ
WKHRQHKDQGDQGDQ\VWDWHPHQWLQWKHSDFNDJLQJRIWKH'$9
3URGXFWRULQDQ\RWKHUGRFXPHQWHQFORVHGZLWKRUXVHGLQWKH
FRQWH[WRIWKHSURPRWLRQRUVDOHRIWKH'$93URGXFWRQWKH
RWKHUKDQGWKHSURYLVLRQVRIWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\VKDOOSUHYDLO
Basic Setup
Playback
Editing
$UELWUDWLRQDQG'LVSXWH5HVROXWLRQ
7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\ODZDQ\FODLPGLVSXWH
FRQWURYHUV\RUGLVDJUHHPHQWZKHWKHUIRUEUHDFKRIZDUUDQW\
EUHDFKRIFRQWUDFWWRUWLQFOXGLQJQHJOLJHQFHXQGHUDVWDWXWH
RUXQGHUDQ\RWKHUODZRUIRUPRIDFWLRQDJDLQVWDQ\RIWKH
5HODWHG3DUWLHVDULVLQJRXWRIRURWKHUZLVHUHODWLQJWRLWKLV
ZDUUDQW\LLWKH'$93URGXFWLLLDQ\RUDORUZULWWHQUHSUHVHQWDWLRQV
VWDWHPHQWVEURFKXUHVSUHVVUHOHDVHVDGYHUWLVLQJDQQRXQFHPHQW
SRLQWRIVDOHGLVSOD\RUSURPRWLRQDOPDWHULDOUHODWLQJWRWKH'$9
3URGXFWLYWKHUHODWLRQVKLSVWKDWUHVXOWIURPWKLVZDUUDQW\WKH
IRUHJRLQJFODLPVGLVSXWHVFRQWURYHUVLHVDQGGLVDJUHHPHQWVDUH
FROOHFWLYHO\UHIHUUHGWRDVWKH'LVSXWHVKDOOEHUHIHUUHGWRDQG
UHVROYHGE\ILQDODQGELQGLQJDUELWUDWLRQWRWKHH[FOXVLRQRIWKH
FRXUWV7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\ODZ\RXDJUHHWRZDLYHDQ\
ULJKWWKDW\RXPD\KDYHWRFRPPHQFHRUSDUWLFLSDWHLQDQ\
UHSUHVHQWDWLYHRUFODVVSURFHHGLQJDJDLQVWWKH5HODWHG3DUWLHV
UHODWLQJWRDQ\'LVSXWH,IDQGZKHUHDSSOLFDEOHDQGWRWKHH[WHQWQRW
SUHFOXGHGE\ODZ\RXIXUWKHUDJUHHWRRSWRXWRIDQ\VXFK
UHSUHVHQWDWLYHRUFODVVSURFHHGLQJV$UELWUDWLRQRIDQ\'LVSXWHZLOO
EHFRQGXFWHGLQWKHIRUXPDQGLQWKHPDQQHUDVDJUHHGWREHWZHHQ
\RXDQG7&/)DLOLQJVXFKDJUHHPHQWWKHDUELWUDWLRQZLOOEH
FRQGXFWHGE\RQHDUELWUDWRUSXUVXDQWWRWKHODZVDQGUXOHVUHODWLQJ
WRDUELWUDWLRQJHQHUDOO\LQIRUFHLQWKHMXULVGLFWLRQLQZKLFK\RXUHVLGH
DWWKHWLPHWKDWWKH'LVSXWHDULVHV7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\
ODZQRFODLPGLVSXWHFRQWURYHUV\RUGLVDJUHHPHQWRIDQ\RWKHU
SHUVRQPD\EHMRLQHGRUFRPELQHGZLWKDQ\'LVSXWHE\\RXZLWKRXW
WKHSULRUZULWWHQFRQVHQWRI7&/
*HQHUDO3URYLVLRQV
,IDQGWRWKHH[WHQWWKDWDQ\SURYLVLRQRIWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\
VKRXOGJHQHUDOO\EHIRXQGWREHXQHQIRUFHDEOHWKH
XQHQIRUFHDEOHSURYLVLRQVKDOOEHVHYHUHGIURPWKHZDUUDQW\
DQGGHHPHGQRWWRIRUPSDUWRIWKHZDUUDQW\7KHUHPDLQLQJ
SURYLVLRQVRIWKLVZDUUDQW\VKDOOEHDQGUHPDLQYDOLGDQG
HQIRUFHDEOH,IDQGWRWKHH[WHQWWKDWDQ\SURYLVLRQRIWKLV
OLPLWHGZDUUDQW\DVLWUHODWHVWRDQ\RIWKH5HODWHG3DUWLHVLV
IRXQGWREHLQYDOLGRUXQHQIRUFHDEOHLQUHVSHFWRIWKDWSDUW\
WKH([FOXGHG3DUW\WKH([FOXGHG3DUW\VKDOOEHGHHPHG
WREHVHYHUHGRUH[FOXGHGIURPWKHSURYLVLRQDQGWKHSURYLVLRQ
VKDOOUHPDLQYDOLGHQIRUFHDEOHDQGDSSOLFDEOHLQUHVSHFWRIWKH
RWKHURUUHPDLQLQJ5HODWHG3DUWLHV
Connections
,)7+('$9352'8&7)$,/672:25.$6:$55$17('$%29(
<28562/($1'(;&/86,9(5(0('<6+$//%(5(3$,525
5(3/$&(0(172)7+('()(&7,9(3$57,112(9(17:,//
7&/726+,%$&25325$7,217+(,5$)),/,$7(6$'5V25
$63V7+(5(/$7('3$57,(6%(/,$%/(72<2825$1<
7+,5'3$57<)25$1<'$0$*(6021(<5(,0%856(0(17
&267625(;3(16(67+,6/,0,7$7,21$33/,(672'$0$*(6
021(<5(,0%856(0(17&267625(;3(16(62)$1<.,1'
:+$762(9(5,1&/8',1*$1<',5(&725,1',5(&7'$0$*(6
'$0$*(723523(57<253(5621/267352),76/267
6$9,1*6,1&219(1,(1&(2527+(563(&,$/,1&,'(17$/
(;(03/$5<25&216(48(17,$/'$0$*(6:+(7+(5)25
%5($&+2):$55$17<%5($&+2)&2175$&77257
,1&/8',1*1(*/,*(1&(81'(5$67$787(2581'(5$1<
27+(5/$:25)25025$&7,2125:+(7+(5$5,6,1*287
2)7+(86(2)25,1$%,/,7<7286(7+('$9352'8&7
(9(1,)$1<2)7+(5(/$7('3$57,(6+$6%((1$'9,6('2)
7+(3266,%,/,7<2)68&+'$0$*(6252)$1<&/$,0%<
$1<27+(53$57<
1RSHUVRQDJHQWGLVWULEXWRUGHDOHURUFRPSDQ\LVDXWKRUL]HGWR
FKDQJHPRGLI\RUH[WHQGWKHWHUPVRIWKHVHZDUUDQWLHVLQDQ\
PDQQHUZKDWVRHYHU
Introduction
LIMITED WARRANTY
Function Setup
&ULWLFDO$SSOLFDWLRQV
7KH'$93URGXFW\RXKDYHSXUFKDVHGLVQRWGHVLJQHGIRUDQ\´FULWLFDO
DSSOLFDWLRQVµ´&ULWLFDODSSOLFDWLRQVµPHDQVOLIHVXSSRUWV\VWHPV
PHGLFDODSSOLFDWLRQVFRQQHFWLRQVWRLPSODQWHGPHGLFDOGHYLFHV
FRPPHUFLDOWUDQVSRUWDWLRQQXFOHDUIDFLOLWLHVRUV\VWHPVRUDQ\RWKHU
DSSOLFDWLRQVZKHUH'$93URGXFWIDLOXUHFRXOGOHDGWRLQMXU\WRSHUVRQV
RUORVVRIOLIHRUFDWDVWURSKLFSURSHUW\GDPDJH
VCR Function
,)7+(&86720(586(67+('$9352'8&7,1$1<&5,7,&$/
$33/,&$7,217+(&86720(5²$1'1277&/,76$)),/,$7(6
$'5V25$63V²$6680(62/($1')8//5(63216,%,/,7<)25
68&+86(7&/5(6(59(67+(5,*+7725()86(726(59,&(
$1<'$9352'8&786(',1$&5,7,&$/$33/,&$7,217&/,76
$)),/,$7(6$'5V$1'$63V+(5(%<',6&/$,0$1<$1'$//
/,$%,/,7<'$0$*(6$1'&216(48(1&(6$5,6,1*2872)7+(
6(59,&(255()86$/726(59,&(68&+'$9352'8&7$1'
)857+(5',6&/$,0$1<$1'$///,$%,/,7<&216(48(1&(6$1'
'$0$*(67+$70$<$5,6(255(68/7)5207+(86(2)7+(
'$9352'8&7,1$1<&5,7,&$/$33/,&$7,216
Others
EN 111
E9KGAUD_D-VR610KU_EN.indd 111
2007/12/18 17:11:40

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project